JP6515768B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes standby processing in a special gaming state .

Conventionally, it has been known that, for example, the progress of a game is stopped when a special character such as BB is won (standby process), and a special part winning notification is issued during this standby process (see, for example, patent document 1) .

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-061034

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to output a test signal that clearly indicates the end of the special bonus operation in a gaming machine of a specification that repeats the special bonus operation in the special game state .

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means. In parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown.
The invention of claim 1 is
Credit number display means (reserved number display LED 71) capable of displaying the number of credits;
And a main control unit (main control board 60) for controlling progress of a game,
The main control means is
Control to start the special gaming state (1BB game) based on satisfying the start condition of the special gaming state (winning 1BB and winning 1BB),
In the special game state, it enables the operation of special features (RB),
In the case where the termination condition of the special gaming state is not satisfied, when the termination condition of the special service is satisfied, the operation of the special role is ended, and the third of the predetermined period (the time corresponding to 5 interrupts (11.175 ms)) After performing 1 wait processing (2-byte time wait processing (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT)), it is possible to start the special role operation again.
The main control means enables execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the predetermined period,
The main control means is
In the interrupt process executed when the special bonus is activated in the special gaming mode, a test signal ("00011000") indicating that the special bonus is activated is the special gaming mode. Processing can be done,
In the interrupt process executed in the predetermined period in which the special bonus is not activated in the special gaming mode, a test signal ("00001000") indicating that the special bonus is not activated is in the special gaming mode. Enable processing for output,
The main control means is displayed on the credit number display means when the information displayed on the credit number display means is updated based on stop display of the symbol combination to which a predetermined profit can be given. The second waiting process (2-byte time) for a specific period (a time corresponding to 46 interrupts (about 100 ms)) after the information is updated until the information displayed on the credit number display means is updated next Make the waiting process (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT) executable.
The specific period is configured to be longer than the predetermined period,
The main control means comprises push order information storage means capable of storing information on push order;
The main control means becomes a specific lottery result (for example, winning of a small winning combination A1), and a predetermined symbol combination (symbol combination of small winning combination 01) when the stop switch is operated in a specific pressing order (pushing order 123) In the game where stop display is enabled, when the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch is satisfied (during AT), the identification is performed based on the information on the pressing order stored in the pressing order information storage unit To output, as a test signal (for example, “1, 127, 127, 127”), specific pressing order information corresponding to the pressing order of the buttons and arbitrary information indicating that the operation timing of the stop switch is an arbitrary operation timing. It is characterized in that processing (steps S249 to S252 in FIG. 55, step S616 in FIG. 64, and FIG. 69) can be performed .

According to the present invention, the waiting process can be used to send a test signal (such as to a testing machine) that clearly indicates the inactivity of the special item .

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining storage capacity of RWM of this embodiment, and ROM. It is a top view which shows storage number indicator LED, acquisition number indicator LED, and status indicator LED in more detail. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digits 1-5 and segment A-P. It is a figure which shows a LED display request | requirement flag and a LED display request | requirement counter. It is a figure which shows the detail of LED segment table 1 and 2 and segment data. It is a figure which shows the data and address of LED segment table 1 and 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the input ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 3-5 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 7-10 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows some data (a medal management flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data of the storage area of RWM (input sheet number display LED signal data etc.). It is a figure which shows some data (LED display request | requirement counter etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (Available number of sheets etc. at the time of 1BB operation | movement) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (a prize and a replay condition apparatus information etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (7) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (8) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (5) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure which shows a prize-and-replay condition apparatus and its winning probability. It is a figure which shows AT lottery table. It is a figure which shows a push order instruction | indication number table, its data, and an address. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between push order instruction numbers and advantageous push orders; It is a figure which shows an effect group number table, its data, and an address. It is a figure explaining transition of RT. It is a figure explaining transition of a main gaming state. It is a flow chart which shows program start processing (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a power supply reset process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) processing. 51 is a flowchart showing a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) process. It is a figure which shows the command transmission table 1, its data, and an address. It is a figure which shows the command transmission table 2, its data, and an address. It is a flowchart which shows control command continuation set (M_CMD_LIST). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows a medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows 2-byte time waiting processing (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows interruption waiting (C_INTR_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows 1 medal addition (MS_MEDAL_INC). It is a flow chart showing push order indication number set processing (M_ORD_INF). FIG. 6 shows a main gaming state check table, and its data and addresses. It is a flowchart which shows production group number set processing (M_ACT_GRP). It is a flow chart which shows stop symbol signal set processing (S_IF2_SET). It is a figure which shows the symbol stop signal table 1, its data, and an address. It is a figure which shows the symbol stop signal table 2, its data, and an address. It is a flowchart which shows reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY). It is a flow chart which shows update processing of the number of medals paid out. It is a flow chart which shows medal payout by winning (MS_WIN_PAY). It is a flowchart which shows game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK). 5 is a flowchart showing 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows RB operation management (M_RB_CTL). It is a flow chart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT). It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN). It is a flowchart which shows control command transmission (I_CMD_OUT). It is a time chart which shows transmission of a sub control data strobe signal and sub control data signals 1-16. It is a flowchart which shows a test signal and condition apparatus information output processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing on / off states of D3 bit (1BB) and D4 bit (RB) in operation state flag information output as a test signal. It is a figure explaining the example of an output of conditional device information. It is a figure which shows 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: (A) is a figure which shows the address of RWM and its content, (B) is a figure which shows a part of flowchart, (C) is in (B), It is a flowchart which shows control command continuation set (M_CONCMDS_SET).

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type and number of condition devices including replay, and their winning probability are unique game states, and "RT transition" transitions from one RT to another RT This means that the type (number) of the condition devices including the replay and the winning probability thereof change. Therefore, the type and number of conditional devices including replay in one RT and the winning probability thereof are values specific to that RT, and the type of conditional device including replay in one RT and the other RT. The numbers and their winning probabilities will never be completely identical.
In the present embodiment, RT includes non-RT, RT1 to RT5 (FIG. 37 described later). Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, and is equivalent to “RT0”. Thus, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.

The “main gaming state” is a concept different from RT, and it is any of so-called normal / at mid-early / at preparation of AT / at during AT, non-internal / inside, normal / at special game It is a concept that indicates
The main gaming state of the present embodiment comprises main gaming states 0 to 7 (FIG. 38 described later. Details will be described later).
Note that "main gaming state" is "state related to notification (state indicating whether to perform notification)", "state related to AT (state indicating whether AT is in progress)", "special mode", etc. It may be called.

The “gaming medium” is a medium provided for gaming, and in the present embodiment, it is a “medal”. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to use a game ball. In addition to the actual medals, the gaming media also include gaming media (data relating to gaming media) stored (credited, stored) electrically inside the gaming machine.
"Bet" means betting on medals (game media) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be betted is set to “3” regardless of which RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the normal game (non-special game), "3" may be set, and in the special game (1BB game or the like), "2" may be set.

  Unlike the above-mentioned "bet", "reserved" refers to crediting a medal inside the slot machine 10. Although "storage" may be used in a meaning including a bet, in the present specification, when "storage" is used, it is used in a meaning not including a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of sheets that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like.

"Care" means that the player inserts a medal directly from the medal insertion slot 43 described later.
The “maintenance bet” means that the player bets a medal by maintaining the medal from the medal insertion slot 43.
The “care storage” means that the player stores medals (adds credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal insertion slot 43.
"Bet medal" means a medal bet.
"Reserved medal" means a medal stored as a credit.

“Reserved bet” is to play a part or all of the medals stored as credits within the range in which the player can bet in the game by operating the bet switch 40 described later. It means to bet.
The “automatic bet” means that when the replay is won, the internal control processing of the slot machine 10 automatically bets the medals of the number betted in the previous game. The above-mentioned maintenance bet medals, stored bet medals, and stored medals can be settled after that, but medals automatically bet by a replay winning can not be settled.
The term "insertion" means to bet or store medals, including the above-mentioned care bet, care storage, storage bet, and automatic bet.
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and / or stored medals to the player.

  “Payout” means paying out a medal to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out a medal by the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out the medals to the player based on the winning combination of the part, it includes both of storing as a credit and paying out an actual medal from a payout opening (not shown). In the payout in this embodiment, “50” sheets are stored as credits as credits, and control is performed such that medals whose stored number exceeds “50” are actually paid out to the player.

  Note that the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment "pays out" the medals to the player is equivalent to the player "acquiring" the medals. Therefore, in the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and in the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 19 etc., there are cases called “payout (number of sheets etc.)” and cases shown as “acquisition (number)” as shown in FIG. 3, but both have the same meaning.

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (especially, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal will be written as "00010000B" or "00010000 (B)" in binary, and it will be written as "10H" or "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. .
However, for binary notations other than 8-bit numbers, the end of “B” is omitted. For example, "0" in the notation such as "register value is" 0 "actually means a binary number of" 00000000B ". Therefore, a number without "B" at the end does not always mean that it is not a binary number. Similarly, numbers without an "H" at the end do not always mean that they are not hexadecimal.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 60 and a sub control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 60 has an input port (0 to 2) and an output port (0 to 10), and includes an RWM (main memory) 61, a ROM 62, a main CPU 63, etc. (meaning that only the one illustrated in FIG. is not).

The RWM 61 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
The ROM 62 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 63 refers to the CPU provided on the main control board 60, executes programs necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. Specifically, lottery of winning combination, drive control of the reel 31, and winning time To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 63 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 60, an MPU including an RWM 61, a ROM 62, a main CPU 63, and a register is mounted. The ROM 62 may be provided outside as well as the one mounted inside the MPU. On the other hand, the RWM 61 is provided only inside the MPU according to the current rules.
On the other hand, an MPU including an RWM 81, a ROM 82, and a main CPU 83 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later, and the RWM 61 is provided outside and outside of the MPU.

FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining storage areas and storage capacities of the RWM 61 and the ROM 62 mounted on the main control means 60. As shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the capacity or the area shown in FIG.
The storage capacity of the RWM 61 is “1,024 KB” in this embodiment, and has a used area of a capacity “512 KB” and an unused area of a capacity “512 KB”. In the use area, data (FIGS. 12 to 16) described later and the like are stored.
The storage capacity of the ROM 62 is “16 KB” in the present embodiment, and has a use area of a capacity “7.5 KB” and an area outside the use area of a capacity “8.5 KB”. Furthermore, the use area has a program area of a capacity of “4.5 KB” and a data area of a capacity of “3.0 KB”.

Here, the “use area” refers to a storage area where information other than information necessary for preventing unauthorized alteration or other change is stored or will be stored (the same as in the RWM 61 and the ROM 62).
Further, the "data area" refers to a storage area in the use area where only information other than the program is stored or to be stored, and data used when the program is executed is stored.

The “program area” refers to a storage area other than the data area in the use area, and stores various programs (such as FIG. 39 described later) executed by the main control unit 60. The program area may be referred to as a "control area".
Furthermore, outside the use area is referred to as a second program area in the present embodiment. In the second program area, another program (for example, a program used at the time of testing) which is not related to the progress of the game is stored. This point will be described later. When the area outside the use area of the ROM 62 is referred to as a second program area, the program area of the use area may be referred to as a first program area.

  In FIG. 1, the main control board 60 and peripheral devices for game progression including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected via an input port or an output port. The input port is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port is a connection unit to transmit a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32.

In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows directing signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 60, and peripheral devices for output are arrows indicated from the main control board 60 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub control board 80).
The push button 25 (also referred to as a “push button unit”) connected to the sub control board 80 can transmit and receive signals bidirectionally. Specifically, a signal indicating that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the sub control substrate 80 based on the operation of the push button 25, and the sub control substrate 80 causes the lamp provided on the push button 25 to emit light.

  In addition, as the timing to make the push button 25 emit light, there is a specific effect that can be switched during game standby that can display history information (total number of times of normal game execution, number of times of AT execution, etc.) regarding the game, and effects currently being output. And the like after the first stop operation of the reel 31 and the like. At this time, it is conceivable that the light emission color is "white" during game standby, and white, blue, red, etc. in accordance with the expectation of AT winning during the game.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to pass through the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is electrically connected to the main control board 60 .
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disapproving the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening when medal insertion is not permitted. Do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35a is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of the medal during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the stop of all the reels 31 and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the combination is won). Do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the medals to be inserted at least when no game is played.

  On the further downstream side of the blocker 45, input sensors 44a and 44b (optical sensors) are provided. Therefore, after the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is detected by the passage sensor 43a, the medal is further detected by the insertion sensors 44a (upstream side) and 44b (downstream side). Note that, as shown in FIG. 1, in the description to be described later, the closing sensor 44 a on the upstream side may be referred to as the closing sensor 1, and the closing sensor 44 b on the downstream side may be referred to as the closing sensor 2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 60 is electrically operated by the player as a bet switch 40, start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and settlement switch 46 as electric Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game. In this embodiment, a 1-bed switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number of) medals are provided.
Furthermore, not only this but a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all for left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle and right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 70 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 60. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 70, and the main control board 60 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 70 are connected, In 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control substrate 60 and the display substrate 70 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another substrate may be interposed between the two.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected (by a harness or the like), and may be connected via another separate board (a relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay board etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80.

  A storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and a status display LED 73 are connected to the display substrate 70. These LEDs 71 to 73 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. Note that it is not necessary for all the LEDs 71 to 73 to be provided on one display substrate 70. For example, a plurality of display substrates 70 such as display substrates 70A, 70B,. It is sufficient if any one of the LEDs 71 to 73 is provided.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the stored number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73 in more detail.
Further, in FIG. 3, a display substrate 70 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 3) is disposed in the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

The storage number display LED 71 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying the lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 71 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, in particular, is configured of a seven segment display (seven segment display unit, so-called 7 segments).
As shown in FIG. 3, the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 70 is four of the digits 1 to 4, but in the present embodiment, there are five digits, and the other digit 5 is the main This corresponds to the setting value display LED 64 (FIG. 1) provided on the control board 60.

The stored number display LED 71 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are betted and stored, the display of the stored number display LED 71 is "00". Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is three, the medal is bet and is not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 71.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 71), no more medals are stored. In this state, temporarily, when the medals are treated from the medal insertion slot 43, the medals that have been kept by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout slot.

  Here, when a combination with a medal payout (except for replay) is won and medals corresponding to that combination are paid out, priority is given to the inside of the slot machine 10 over the actual payout of medals from the payout opening. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored sheets before the winning combination is “10”, when the nine-piece winning combination is won, the display of the stored number display LED 71 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning combination, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored pieces is “47” before winning a winning combination, and nine medals are paid out by winning a combination of 9 winnings, 3 pieces are stored, the number of stored pieces becomes “50”, and “50” is exceeded. About six pieces are paid out from the payout opening.

  Furthermore, at the time of winning a replay, storage and payout of medals are not performed, and the number of medals betted in the game is automatically betted for replay. For example, when the player plays the game with 3 bets (3 sheets) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically betted. And, since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of the medal for performing the re-game, the medal can not be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter.

  In the "rules related to the authorization of the gaming machine and the verification of the type etc.", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay has stopped on the effective line, it is not the "winning" that is the operation of the condition device pertaining to replay It is being interpreted. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), Replay is also treated as one of the roles (Replay Role), and the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to Replay has stopped on the effective line is referred to as "Replay win".

Further, the acquisition number display LED 72 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of acquisitions of the player) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying the lower digit There is. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 72 displays two digits as in the case of the storage number display LED 71.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the number of obtained LEDs 72 is "00". However, for example, when nine medals are paid out and nine medals are paid out, the displayed number of obtained LEDs 72 is: It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquisition number display LED 72 may be controlled to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Further, although the acquisition number display LED 72 normally displays the acquisition number, it functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the winning number display LED 72 is an AT game or the like that is advantageous for the player (pushing order for stopping highs when there is a high and a low in the winning combination of winning combinations to the active line). Also, the slot machine 10 functions as an LED for displaying information (pushing order instruction information) including the pushing order to shift (induce) to the intended RT or the main gaming state on the slot machine 10 side. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 72 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves as the display of the acquisition number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. The notification of the advantageous push order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the push order using the acquisition number display LED 72 by the main control board 60 is referred to as “display of push order instruction information”, and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is It is called "informing".
Further, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 described later, the numbers corresponding to the advantageous push order are referred to as “push order instruction numbers”.
Furthermore, data to be stored at the address "F00E", for example, data such as "102" as shown in step S220 in FIG. 52 described later will be referred to as "push order instruction data".

Furthermore, the pressing order is executed in step S645 of FIG. 65 described later and displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 shown in FIG. 3, for example, “= 2” when the pressing order instruction data is “102”, It is called "pushing order instruction information".
As described above, the values (FIG. 34; “0” to “9”) stored in the ROM 62 are referred to as “push order instruction numbers”, and the data (“101 H” to “109 H”) stored in the address “F00E”. Is referred to as “push order instruction data”, and information (“= 1” to “= 9”) displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 is referred to as “push order instruction information”.

In FIG. 3, the status display LED 73 is configured of seven LEDs (73 a to 73 g).
The replay display LED 73a is an LED that lights up at the time of winning a replay, and when an automatic bet based on a replay winning is performed, the replay display LED 73a lights up to notify the player that the automatic betting is in progress.

The insertion permission display LED 73b is an LED that lights up when it is possible to insert a medal. In other words, it lights up before the game is over and the medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In the present embodiment, even if the replay is activated, the light is on when the bet can be made according to the number of stored sheets.
The settlement display LED 73c is an LED that lights up during the settlement process in the present embodiment. When the settlement switch 46 is turned on with stored medals and / or bet medals (except for the automatic bet at the time of replay winning), it lights up while medals are actually being paid out.

  The game start LED 73 d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, when the medal is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted), it does not light.

  (1 sheet, 2 sheets, 3 sheets) The insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are LEDs for displaying the number of medals being betted, respectively, and when 1 medal is bet, “1 BET (1 sheet insertion display LED 73e ") Lights up, and when 2 medals are betted," 1 BET (1 sheet insertion display LED 73e) "and" 2 BET (2 sheet insertion display LED 73f) "lights up and 3 medals bet At the same time, “1 BET (1 sheet insertion display LED 73 e)”, “2 BET (2 sheet insertion display LED 73 f)” and “3 BET (3 sheet insertion display LED 73 g)” are lighted.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1 to 5 and the segments A to P.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P (eight in total), and segments A to G (seven) of them constitute so-called seven segments. Furthermore, the segment P constitutes any one of the status display LEDs 73 (except for the digit 2).

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, of the digit 1, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71, and the segment P constitutes a game start LED 73d.
Further, in FIG. 4, among the digits 3, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the high-order digit of the acquisition number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes a closeable display LED 73b.

Similarly, in FIG. 4, among the digits 4, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes the replay display LED 73a.
Further, in FIG. 4, of the digits 5, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the setting value display LED 64, and the segment P constitutes a settlement display LED 73c.

  From the above, for example, when all segments (segments A to P) of digit 1 are lighted, storage number display LED 71 (upper digit) displays “8” by lighting of segments A to G, and segment P During the state display LED 73, the game start LED 73d is turned on.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_SEG_DSP) and the LED display request counter (_CT_SEG_DSP).
The LED display request flag is a flag indicating which LED can be lighted, and is stored as a 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7) in a predetermined area ("F010" in FIG. 14 described later) of RWM 61 Ru.
Then, for example, when the upper digit and the lower digit of the digits 1 and 2, ie, the storage number indicator LED 71 can be displayed, the LED display request flag is such that the D0 and D1 bits become “1” and the other digits can not be displayed. Then, the other bits are "0". Therefore, the data of the LED display request flag in this case is "00000011B".

As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, digit 5 (set value display LED 64) is turned off and digits 1 to 4 are turned on at normal times (during game play and game standby). Therefore, the LED display request flag at the normal time is “00001111B”.
Also, while the setting is being changed, the D4 bit becomes “1” because the setting value is displayed on the digit 5, and becomes “0” because the digits 1 and 2 (storage number display LED 71) are not displayed. In order to display "-" on the acquisition number display LED 72), it becomes "1". Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting change is “00011100B”.

  Furthermore, during setting confirmation, since the set value is displayed on the digit 5 as in the case of changing the setting, the D4 bit becomes "1". Furthermore, digits 1 to 4 are the same as in normal times. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “00011111B”.

The LED display request flag described above is a flag whose value differs depending on whether the setting is being changed, or the setting is being checked.
On the other hand, the LED display request counter is 1 byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7) like the LED display request flag, and data whose value is updated every timer interrupt (2.235 ms) described later It is. Further, the LED display request counter is stored in a predetermined area (“F00F” in FIG. 14 described later) in the same manner as the LED display request flag.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED display request counter takes “00010000 B” as an initial value, and the digit turned on (“1”) shifts to the right by one digit each time the interrupt processing is performed (execution of shift instruction) ) As updated. Then, when the value of the LED display request counter is "00000001B", it becomes "00000000B" at the time of the next interrupt, but when it becomes "0" after updating, it is again the initial value at the time of the interrupt 00010000B "is set. In the next interrupt after all bits have become "0", the initial value "00010000B" may be set.
Further, the assignment of digits to each bit of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter shown in FIG. 5 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5, but can be designed in various ways. For example, it is also possible to make D0 to D2 unused and to assign D3 to D7 to each digit.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, as a result of AND operation of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter, a digit of “1” becomes a lighting target at the time of the interrupt processing.
As described later, when displaying error contents (numbers) when an error that can not be restored (error that can not be restored if power is not switched on after power failure) occurs in the slot machine 10, the LED is displayed. There is no reference to the display request flag or the LED display request counter.
On the other hand, in the case of a recoverable error (error that can be recovered without power on / off etc.), the result of “AND” operation of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter is “1”. "" Is the target of lighting.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an LED segment table and the like stored in the ROM 62. As shown in FIG. The LED segment table is a table for storing display data when the digits 1 to 5 are lighted, and an LED segment table 1 ((A) in the figure) for storing alphabetic display data (used for error display etc.) , And an LED segment table 2 ((B) in the figure) storing data for displaying “=” when displaying numerical display data and push order instruction information.
Also, in the figure, (C) shows the relationship between 1-byte data and the corresponding segment.
In FIG. 6, "DEFB" indicates storing 1 byte (8 bits) data in the assembler language. Note that "DEFW" described later indicates that 2-byte data is stored in the assembler language.

As shown in FIG. 6, for example, “C” display data is “00111001 (B)”. That is, segments A, D, E, and F are “1 (on; lit)”, and segments B, C, G, and P are “0 (off, extinguished)”. Therefore, in FIG. 4, when segments A, D, E, and F are turned on, “C” in 7 segments is displayed.
Also, for example, “=” display data is “01001000 (B)”. That is, in FIG. 4, the segments D and G become “1 (on; lit)”, the central and lower horizontal segments are lit, and “=” is displayed by 7 segments.

The respective data of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 6 are stored in the data area of the ROM 62 in the order of address.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing data of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 in the data area of the ROM 61. As shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the start address is set to “1811”, and the data of the LED segment table 1 is stored sequentially from “1811”. Similarly, in the data of the LED segment table 2, the start address is set to "1816", and the data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from "1816".

Thereby, each data of the LED segment table 1 can be represented by the offset value from the top address "1811". Similarly, each data in the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the start address “1816”.
For example, when reading data in LED segment data table 2, when the start address "1816" is specified and the content to be displayed is "5", an address obtained by adding the offset value "5" to the start address "1816" That is, if the data of "181 B" is read, the "5" display data can be read.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The motor 32 and the like of the symbol display device 30 are electrically connected to the main control board 60.
The symbol display device 30 includes reels (three in the present embodiment) for displaying symbols, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 39 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each of the reels 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 63g described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, and when the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side surface of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one turn, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 39. The signal of the reel sensor 39 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the in-reel sensor 39, the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Also, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 39 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 62 in advance. Thereby, the pattern on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  Further, a medal payout device 35 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The medal payout device 35 detects a hopper 35a for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 which is driven to pay out the medals of the hopper 35a from the payout port, and a medal for detecting the medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. Dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are provided.

The medals, which are maintained and accepted from the medal insertion slot 43, are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35a through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a "shoot portion").
The payout sensors 37a and 37b, like the input sensors 44a and 44b, are provided with a payout sensor 37a on the upstream side and a payout sensor 37b on the downstream side.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 1, in the description to be described later, there are also cases where the upstream delivery sensor 37a is referred to as a payout sensor 1 and the downstream delivery sensor 37b is referred to as a payout sensor 2.

  The payout sensors 37a and 37b are disposed at a predetermined distance, and are configured to be detected by the payout sensor 37b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medals are detected by the payout sensor 37a. Then, based on the timing when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are respectively turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly dispensed.

For example, when the signals from the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both OFF even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that a medal has not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37a or 37b remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred. Alternatively, only one payout sensor 37 may be provided to detect the above error.
The fullness sensor 38 is a sensor that detects the fullness of the sub tank 35b that accommodates the medals overflowing from the hopper 35a, and is configured from a circuit that is energized when the medals of the subtank 35b become full.

The door switch 16 is a switch that is turned on when the front cover (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / close state of the front cover.
Further, the power switch 51 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 52 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port and rotated to the right by 90 degrees, and turned on at the time of setting confirmation or setting change.

The setting change / reset switch 53 is a switch in which one switch doubles as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch and the reset switch may be provided separately.
The setting change / reset switch 53 is operated when changing the setting value. In addition, when the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, a reset, that is, an initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.

  The setting door switch 54 is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of a door (not shown) covering the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53. For example, when the setting door switch 54 is off, that is, when the setting key switch 52 is on with the setting door not opened, an error occurs.

FIG. 8 is a view showing input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. As shown in FIG. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing output ports 0 to 5 and 7 to 10 provided on the main control board 60. FIG. Although the slot machine 10 is also provided with the output port 6 in practice, it is not shown because it is not directly related to the present embodiment.
The input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 10 in this embodiment are 1-byte ports to which eight bits D0 to D7 can be input or output.
Although the input port and the output port are provided in addition to the above, the description will be omitted in this embodiment.

  Further, in FIGS. 8 to 10, ports indicated as unused are not actually used, or mean input / output ports of signals which will not be described in the present embodiment (ports without input / output of signals Does not mean all unused).

  In FIG. 8, the input port 0 receives signals of a settlement switch 46 which is an operation switch, a bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40 a and 3 bet switch 40 b), a start switch 41 and a stop switch 42. Although the example of FIG. 8 divides the 1 bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3 bet switch signal (D2 bit), when it is a slot machine 10 of a specification in which only the 3 bet switch 40 is provided, The D1 bit of input port 0 is not used.

Further, to the input port 1, respective signals of the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 16, the setting door switch 54, the setting key switch 52, the setting change / reset switch 53, (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39 are input .
Furthermore, in the input port 2, a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), signals of the closing sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b), payout sensors 1 (37a) and 2 (37b) And the signal of the full sensor 38 are input. When the slot machine 10 is not provided with the setting door switch 54, the D2 bit of the input port 1 is not used.

  Then, as described later, a main process (FIG. 41 described later; M_MAIN) (also referred to as a main loop) to be performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with the game. In the main processing, detection of inserted medals, winning processing after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the like are performed.

  During this main processing, the main processing is temporarily left, and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed (FIG. 64 described later; I_INTR). Then, in the interrupt process, the process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S607 in FIG. 64) is executed, and after the process is executed, the process of returning to the main process is periodically performed. The interval of the interruption time is 2.235 ms in the present embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt processing of 2.235 ms interval.

  Then, based on the acquired data, level data (data indicating on / off of each bit) and rising data of the input port (previous interrupt is off, current interrupt is on) for each of the input ports 0 to 2 Data indicating which bit the data has become) and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is on when the previous interrupt was on and the current interrupt was off) And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Also, regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed, all the D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected. For example, during rotation of the reel 31 (before the stop switch 42 is operated), since the player can not operate the bet switch 40 by the player, data of D1 and D2 bits of the input port 0 are necessarily acquired. Although not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits are acquired. Then, if all bits of data are obtained, it is also possible to make an error determination. For example, there is a case where the rising data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
Also, for example, if 1-byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is acquired, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

  In the output port 0 of FIG. 9, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and is configured to drive the reel 31 by a combination of four phases of φ0 to φ3. Are output from predetermined bits.

Also, the signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the hopper 35 a when the blocker signal is “1” (on), and when it is “0” (off), A passage (return passage) connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the payout opening is formed.
Then, for example, when driving the blocker 45, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 0 by interrupt processing.

The φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 1. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D4 to D7 bits.
Further, from the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, signals for lighting the three-sheet insertion display LED 73g, the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f, and the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e in the status display LED 73 are output. Further, a sub control data strobe signal is output from bit D7. Here, the sub control data strobe signal is a signal to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 together with sub control data signals 1 to 16 described later. When the sub control board 80 receives the sub control data strobe signal, it obtains data of the sub control data signals 1 to 16 from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rise of the sub control data strobe signal. Control. The signal transmission timing and the like will be described later (FIG. 68).

  The output port 3 is used for the output of the LED digit signal. Also, the output port 4 is used for the output of the LED segment signal. These LED digit signals and LED segment signals are signals for turning on / off the setting value display LED 64, the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

Specifically, for example, when the data of the output port 3 is "00000001B", only the digit 1 is turned on, so only the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71 is turned on. Furthermore, when the data of the output port 4 is “00111111B”, the signals of the segments A to F are turned on, so “0” is displayed on the digit 1.
As described above, it is determined which digit is to be lighted at the output port 0 and which segment is to be lighted at the output port 1.

Furthermore, an external (outer end) signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100 is output from the output port 5, and in the present embodiment, the external signals 1 to 5, the medal payout signal, and the medal input (bet) signal are output. Be done.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal for outputting to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hole computer, data counter installed in the hole, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal plate 100. In this embodiment, the external signal 1 indicating AT activation, the external signal 2 indicating AT continuation, the external signal 3 indicating the start time to the end time of the AT, the occurrence of an error or a power failure generated in the slot machine 10, etc. And an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the external signal 1 as a specific RT, or set the external signal 2 as a signal at the time of a specific special game such as 1BB. It is not necessarily limited to the AT.

The output ports 7 and 8 are ports for outputting sub control data signals (control commands to be transmitted to the sub control board 80). The output port 7 outputs sub control data signals 1 to 8, and the output port 8 Sub control data 9 to 16 are output.
Further, the output ports 9 and 10 are set as ports for transmitting a predetermined signal (information) to the tester. Here, the “test signal” refers to a connection between the slot machine 10 (game machine) and a test machine, and the slot machine 10 transmits a predetermined signal to the test machine, so that the slot machine 10 This is a signal that is used to confirm that it is designed in accordance with the “Rules on Accreditation of the Certification and Type of Verification, etc.”. The connection between the slot machine 10 and the tester is not limited to that directly connected, but may be connected via an interface board for relaying.

Condition devices 1 to 8 are assigned to the output port 9. Here, the “condition device” indicates a so-called winning number (kind of winning), and in the present embodiment, as described later, the D6 and D7 bits indicate the presence or absence of winning a bonus (special role), The type of winning is indicated by D0 to D5 bits. By using D0 to D5 bits, 64 types of winning patterns can be output. By outputting a signal from the output port 9, it is possible to inform the outside which condition device is on (which has been won) in the game.
The output port 10 is an output port of the test signals 1 to 8. The specific content of the test signal will be described later.
As described above, in one interrupt, data (referred to as “level data”) based on the signals of input ports 0 to 2 is stored, and control stored for output ports 0 to 10 is stored. Output a signal based on the data.

  12 to 16 are diagrams showing storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM 61 and the contents thereof. The data shown in FIGS. 12 to 16 are data to be used in the description of this embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 61 is not limited to these data.

  In FIG. 12, "_FL_MEDAL_STS" of the address "F01B" is a data storage area of the medal management flag. The medal management flag is a flag for mainly controlling on / off of the state display LED 73. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 reception state, and when the start switch 41 is received, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, the medal is bet and the state before the start of the game) When it becomes "1" and the operation acceptance of the start switch 41 is impossible (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), it is set to "0".

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 45 is on and “0” when the blocker 45 is off. By determining the value of the D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state (on or off) the current blocker 45 is.
The D3 bit replay display LED is data that is set to “1” when replay is displayed and medals are automatically inserted for replay (step S 141 in FIG. 48). When this data is "1", the replay display LED 73a of the above-mentioned state display LEDs 73 is lit. Also, it is data to be set to “0” when the game by the re-game is ended (step S73 in FIG. 41, step S542 in FIG. 61). When this data is "0", the replay display LED 73a goes out.

  The settlement display LED of D4 bit is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 46 is operated and the stored medals are settled. When this data is "1", the settlement display LED 73c of the above-mentioned state display LEDs 73 is lit. In addition, it is data that is set to “0” when the settlement of stored medals is finished.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is formed to light up when the settlement of stored medals that can be stored up to a maximum of 50 pieces is performed, but bet medals and stored medals can be In the case of being formed to be settled, it is preferable that the bet or stored medals be formed so as to be set to “1” (so that the settlement display LED 73 c is lighted).

  The setting change impossible flag of D6 bit is data that becomes “0” when the setting change is possible, and becomes “1” otherwise. In this embodiment, the data is set to “1” when the start switch 41 is operated to advance the game, and “0” is received when medal acceptance for the next game is started (step S133 in FIG. 48). It is data to be made "." At the time of setting change, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the setting change impossible flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change impossible flag is “1”, when it is judged as an unrecoverable error (for example, the update abnormality of the random number judged for each interrupt processing), the setting change is permitted, and the setting change is It is possible to cancel the non-returnable error based on this.

  The medal limit setting determination of the D7 bit is data in which the bet medal number is “1” when the bet medal number has reached the medal limit number, and is “0” when the bet medal number has not been reached. As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit number of sheets is set to 3 (normal and 1 BB in game). Therefore, for example, during normal times, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, it becomes "0" because it has not reached the medal limit, and when it is 3, it has reached the medal limit. It will be 1 ".

“_FL_ACTION” of the address “F015” is a data storage area of the operation state flag, and in the present embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit, 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit, and RB is assigned to the D4 bit.
For example, when the replay is won, the replay is activated, and the D0 bit is set to "1" when the gaming state is set (step S88 in FIG. 42). The D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the game by the re-game is over (step S73 in FIG. 41, step S543 in FIG. 61).
Further, although not provided in the present embodiment, when 2BB or CB is provided, for example, the assignment may be made to free bits of the operation state flag (for example, 2BB to D1 bit and CB to D2 bit).

"_FL_WIN" of the address "F043" is a storage area of the symbol combination display flag, and in the present embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped, the D0 bit is set to "1". And this bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the next game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated).
Also, although not provided in this embodiment, when 2BB, CB, (independently elected) RB is provided, for example, 2BB in D1 bit, CB in D2 bit, CB, D4 so as to correspond to the operation status flag. Assigning RB is mentioned.

  In FIG. 13, "_PT_MEDAL_LED" of the address "F01D" is a storage area of the number-of-inputs display LED data, and 3 to 1 input display LEDs 73g to 73e are assigned to bits D0 to D2, respectively. For example, when only the D2 bit is "1", control is performed so that only the single-sheet insertion display LED 73e is lit. In addition, when the D1 and D2 bits are "1", the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f are controlled to light.

Furthermore, "_NB_REP_MEDAL" of the address "F06A" is a storage area of automatic insertion number data (data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of replay winning), and "3" is stored in this embodiment.
“_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06B” is a storage area of medal bet number data, and in the present embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored.
“_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” is a storage area of medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, any one of the values “0” to “9” is stored. In the present embodiment, since the maximum payout number of medals in one game is 9, the maximum value of the medal payout number data is “9”. However, for example, when a 15-sheet payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

"_BF_PAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06D" is a storage area of the medal payout number data buffer, and in this embodiment, similarly to "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06C", any of the values "0" to "9" Is stored.
In the present embodiment, when the winning combination is determined, the values of both “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” and “_BF_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” are updated. At the time of this update, the same value is stored in both addresses. Then, "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06C" is subtracted for each medal payout, and becomes "0" when medal payout is completed. On the other hand, "_BF_PAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06D" is maintained without updating its value depending on the medal payout. The stored value is maintained until the value is updated at the end of the next game.

  “_NB_PAYOUT” of the address “F00E” is a storage area of acquired sheet number data. When the small winning combination is won and the medals are paid out, the paid-out number is stored in the acquired number data. And based on this data, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is controlled. For example, when the acquired sheet number data is "1", this data "1" is read, and "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, “9” is stored in the “_NB_PAY_MEDAL (the medal payout number data)” of the address “F06C” described above, for example, when nine winning combinations are won, and at the time of medal payout (including addition to the stored number) It is a counter that is decremented according to the number of payouts, such as “9” → “8” → “7” →... → “0”.
On the other hand, “_NB_PAYOUT (acquired number of sheets data)” of the address “F00E” is, for example, “1” → “2” → “3” →. In addition, it is the counter which is added according to the medal payout.
Therefore, the display by the acquisition number display LED 72 is performed using “_NB_PAYOUT (acquisition number data)”.

“_NB_CREDIT” of the address “F00D” is a storage area of the storage quantity display data, and data for displaying the storage quantity at that time is stored in the storage quantity display LED 71 described above.
Here, in the present embodiment, although the data itself is hexadecimal (H), a value obtained by converting the number of stored sheets into decimal is stored. For example, when the number of stored sheets to be displayed is "29", the value "29H" is stored. In other words, "00101001B" is stored in the address "F00D". Thus, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F00D" are used to display the lower digit ("9" in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are of the stored number. The upper digit ("2" in this example) is stored as data for displaying. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the data value to be stored is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  And in this embodiment, the address of RWM61 which memorize | stores storage sheet number data itself is not provided, but the storage sheet number display data is provided as display data of storage number display LED71. However, the stored sheet number display data is the stored sheet number data itself.

In FIG. 14, "_CT_SEG_DSP" of the address "F00F" is a storage area for storing the value of the LED display request counter described above. Further, "_FL_SEG_DSP" of the address "F010" is a storage area for storing the value of the LED display request flag described above.
Furthermore, “_BF_ERR_DSP” of the address “F011” is a storage area for storing the contents of an error that has occurred when a recoverable error has occurred in the slot machine 10. When a recoverable error has not occurred, "00H" is stored. Then, when a recoverable error occurs, a value corresponding to the occurred error is stored, and in the present embodiment, nine types of errors are detected as shown in FIG. Note that the recoverable error is not limited to this.
Then, while a recoverable error occurs, a value corresponding to the error is stored, but when the cause of the error is removed (when the error is recovered), the value is updated to “00H”.

  "_PT_STS_LED" of the address "F012" is a storage area for storing ON / OFF of the game start display LED 73d (D0), the insert enable display LED 73b (D2), and the replay display LED 73a (D3) among the above-mentioned state display LEDs 73. is there.

  In FIG. 15, “_CT_BB1_PAY” at addresses “F060” and “F061” is a counter for acquiring the number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation (storage area for storing the maximum number of medals that can be acquired in 1BB game). "451" (decimal number) is set as an initial value at the start of 1BB gaming. Then, each time the medal is paid out, the stored value is subtracted. That is, the 1BB game of this embodiment ends with the payout of over 450 medals. In addition, since the number-of-sheets counter at the time of 1BB operation counts the range of “0” to “451” (decimal number), 2-byte address “F060” (upper 8 bits) and “F061” (lower 8 bits) However, in the case of adopting, for example, a range of “0” to “255” or less, only one-byte address “F060” is used.

“_CT_BONUS_PLAY” of the address “F073” is a storage area of the game number counter at the time of RB operation, and in the present embodiment, “0” to “2” are stored.
Further, "_CT_BONUS_WIN" of the address "F074" is a storage area of the winning number counter at the time of RB operation, and in the present embodiment, "0" to "2" are stored.
Here, in the present embodiment, 1BB (character product continuous operation device) is provided as a big bonus, and during 1BB gaming, RB (first class special character) is operated (RB game is executed). It is set. Furthermore, the RB game is set to operate continuously until the number of times of game fulfills 2 times or the number of times of prize fulfills at least one of 2 times and the condition for termination of 1BB game (payout exceeding 450 pieces) is satisfied. ing.
Therefore, during the 1BB game, the number of times of RB game and the number of wins are continuously counted.

  “_CT_INTR” of the addresses “F02B” and “F02C” is a storage area of the interrupt counter (also referred to as interrupt counter value storage means). The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of “0” to “65535”, and the value is updated (“+1”) for each interrupt. In the present embodiment, since “0” to “65535” are adopted as the value of the interrupt counter, a 2-byte address “F02B” (upper 8 bits) and the same as the above-mentioned acquired number counter at the time of 1BB operation Although “F02C” (lower 8 bits) is used, for example, in the case of adopting a range of “0” to “255”, only one-byte address “F02B” is used.

  "_TM2_GAME" of the address "F03A" is a timer for monitoring one minimum game time, and is a timer which is decremented by "1" for each interrupt when "1836" is set as an initial value. The minimum game time of this embodiment is set to “4.1 seconds” (2.235 ms × 1836 ≒ 4100 ms).

"_NB_CND_NOR" of address "F039" is a storage area of winning and replay condition device number (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "condition device number"), a lottery of the condition device is performed, and the winning of this storage Values corresponding to the winning and replay condition device are stored. The values stored here are used for the selection of the stop position determination table used for the stop control of the reels 31, the AT lottery (the addition during AT), the selection of the effect group number, and the like.
In the present embodiment, the winning combination (small part) which is a condition device which does not carry over the winning information to the next game, the replay condition device numbers “0” to “51”, and the winning combination which can carry over to the next game An item condition device number "1" is provided. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number of the address "F039" is a storage area of the condition device which does not carry over the winning information to the next game.

  On the other hand, "_NB_CND_BNS" of address "F040" is a storage area of the feature condition apparatus number capable of carrying over the winning information, and in the present embodiment, "0" or "1" depending on the presence or absence of 1BB winning. Is stored. Similarly to the above, this value is also used for selection of the stop position determination table used for stop control of the reels 31, AT lottery (addition during AT), selection of effect group number, and the like. When two 1BBs are provided or when one 2BB is provided in addition to one 1BB, not only the presence or absence of winning of the special part (bonus part) but also the type of winning of the special part is indicated. In addition, one of “0”, “1” and “2” is stored.

“_NB_RT_STS” of the address “F001” is a storage area for storing the RT state number. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, there are six types of “0” (non-RT) to “5” (RT5) as RT states, and data indicating which RT the current RT is. Remember.
"_NB_GAM_STS" of the address "F08F" is a storage area for storing the number of the main gaming state. In the present embodiment, eight main game states "main game state 0" to "main game state 7" are provided, and data indicating which main game state the current main game state is is stored. Do. For example, when the main gaming state 0, "0" is stored.

"_CT_GAM_STS" of the address "F099" is a storage area for storing a precursor counter and an AT counter value. In the present embodiment, during non-AT called “normally medium” (state without the right to execute the AT), a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute the AT based on the winning condition device. Then, when it is determined to execute the AT, the precursor counter value is determined by lottery. The precursor counter value is determined in a decimal number in the range of “0” to “32”, and the determined value is stored in the storage area of the address. Then, for each game, the counter value is decremented by “1”, and when it becomes “0”, the process shifts to AT preparation (playing state prior to execution of AT).
In addition, the AT stores an initial value (for example, "30" in decimal) of the AT's game count in the address. Then, for each game, the counter value is decremented by "1" each time, and when it becomes "0", the AT is ended.
In addition, since precursor (in non-AT) and in AT do not progress simultaneously, one address “F099” is a precursor counter that counts the number of precursor games and an AT counter that counts the number of games in AT. And the storage capacity of the RWM 61 can be reduced.

“_NB_ORD_INF” of the address “F0B8” is a storage area for storing a push order instruction number. In the present embodiment, an advantageous push order is assigned to the player for each winning (winning and replay) condition device (including both cases where the player has and does not have the push order advantageous to the player). When the predetermined condition is satisfied, push order instruction information corresponding to the winning condition device is acquired and stored in this address. For example, as shown in FIG. 34, when the winning condition apparatus number is "23", the push order instruction information is "1", so this "1" is stored.
Note that "when a predetermined condition is satisfied" is when "Yes" is obtained in step S214 of FIG. 52 described later (in the push order instruction state). Therefore, when the push order instruction state is obtained, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the RWM 61. However, when the push order instruction state is not obtained, the processing after step S215 is not executed. Storage is not performed.

  “_NB_ACT_GRP” of the address “F0B7” is a storage area for storing the effect group number. In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the condition device is performed, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the winning condition device number is "23", "13" is selected as the effect group number, and this "13" is stored.

  In FIG. 16, "_NB_CNDINF_N" of address "F04C" is a storage area of winning and replay condition device information, and when a lottery of the condition device is performed, the number (condition device number) corresponding to the winning condition device is stored. Be done. In other words, this address is a storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the tester, which is generated based on "_NB_CND_NOR" of the address "F039". In the winning and replay condition device information, information is generated so that the D6 bit is always "1", and the D0 to D5 bits have values corresponding to the winning condition device ("0" in this embodiment). ~ "One of 51" is stored. For example, when "00000101B" is stored in the address "F039" (when replay B4 is won in this embodiment), "01000101B" is stored in the address "F04C". When "00000000B" is stored at the address "F039" (when the condition device number "0"), "01000000B" is stored at the address "F04C".

  In addition, “_NB_CNDINF_B” of address “F04D” is a storage area of character article condition apparatus number, and corresponds to the condition apparatus that has won according to the presence or absence of 1BB (2BB when 2BB is provided). The number to be stored is stored. In other words, this address is a storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the tester, which is generated based on "_NB_CND_BNS" of the address "F040". In this item condition device information, information is generated so that the D7 bit is always "1", and the D0 bit is set to "0" when 1BB is not won, and D0 is selected when 1BB is won or inside 1BB. The bit is "1". For example, when "00000001B" is stored in the address "F040" (when 1BB is won in the present embodiment), "10000001B" is stored in the address "F04D". When "00000000B" is stored in the address "F040" (in the present embodiment, when 1 BB is not won), "10000000B" is stored in the address "F04D".

“_TM1_COND_OUT” of the address “F030” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information and role condition condition device information), and in the present embodiment After the minimum game time has elapsed, “25” is set, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. The subtraction of the timer value is performed in step S605 (timer measurement) of the interrupt process described later.
In the present embodiment, approximately 243.5 interrupts are counted and approximately 53.64 ms are counted, and this 53.64 ms is the output time of the condition device signal. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the timer value “25” is set after the minimum game time has elapsed, the timer value is updated to “24” in the first interrupt process. Then, while the timer value is “24” to “13”, the character product condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is output, and while the timer value is “12” to “1”, winning and replay condition device information ( Output _NB_CNDINF_N). Furthermore, while the timer value is "0", the value "0" is output as the conditional device information.

“_BF_SUBCMD” at addresses “F113” to “F153” is a storage area of a control command buffer (ring buffer), and stores control commands to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. In this storage area, 64 bytes of "F113" to "F153" (H) are secured. Control commands are stored in the control command buffer in order of address, and when the control command is stored at the address "F153", the address at which the control command is stored next is "F113".
"_NB_CMDREAD" of the address "F017" is a storage area of the control command read pointer value. This value is a value for storing which address of the control command buffer should be read, and is incremented by “1” when the data of the control command buffer of the address is read.

  “_NB_CMDSTORE” of the address “F018” is a storage area of the control command write pointer value. This value is a value for storing in which address of the control command buffer the control command should be written, and is incremented by “1” when the control command is written in the control command buffer of the address.

Subsequently, a combination of symbols and combinations of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 17 is a view showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 17, symbol numbers are shown together. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "Replay B".

As shown in FIG. 17, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
As shown in FIG. 17, in the present embodiment, “Replay” includes “Replay A” and “Replay B” which are different symbols. Moreover, "watermelon" is provided with "watermelon A" and "watermelon B" which are different designs. Furthermore, "BAR" is provided with "black BAR" and "white BAR" which are different designs.

18A shows the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 11 provided in the front mask portion (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10 and the respective reels 31, and the effective line (symbol) (Display line for displaying the combination of
Three reels (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the lateral direction in the present embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols which are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 11. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 11 of the slot machine 10. The numbers at the lower right of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

Moreover, FIG. 18 (B) has illustrated the admiration of the symbol position in this specification. In this specification, the symbol position at the time of stop seen from the display window 11 is referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage” in order from the top for each reel 31 and “left upper 31” It shall be referred to as "stage", "left middle stage" and "lower left stage".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18A, effective lines are set for the nine symbols seen from the display window 11.
Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a combination of symbols, and of the symbol corresponding to any one of the roles. When the combination is stopped on the line, it is a line that wins the part. In the present embodiment, one valid line ("lower left row"-"middle middle row"-"straight line rising upward to the right through the upper right row") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. It has become. For example, straight graphic combination lines passing through the middle left, middle and right middle stages are invalid lines in this embodiment.

  An invalid line is a line which is not set as an effective line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the symbols is stopped at that line, the provision of a profit according to the combination It is a line that does not pay out medals, etc. That is, an invalid line is a line which is not a formation object of a combination of symbols from the beginning.

  Also, conventionally, slot machines having different numbers of valid lines according to the number of medals inserted are known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is one, the number of valid lines is one when the number of medals inserted is three, and when the number of medals inserted is three, the number of effective lines is five. And the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the game, two or three medals are inserted to play a game, and one game shown in FIG. 18A is an effective line in all the games, and the medal is There is no change in the number of valid lines due to the number of input. Therefore, in the present specification, the term “effective line” refers to a straight line in the diagonally upper right direction shown in FIG.

19 to FIG. 26 are diagrams showing combinations of types of symbols, payout numbers, etc., and symbols in the present embodiment (combinations etc. included in the condition device selected by the lottery means 61 described later). In addition, in FIG. 26, although it is not a combination, specific symbols 01 to 03 (spilled eyes) are also shown together as a combination of symbols that may be displayed when winning in a specific condition device (FIG. Middle, part numbers "155" to "160" (described later).
The roles of this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays, and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the combinations is stopped on the active line (the combination of winnings is the same). The number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning of the special part is set to zero. Also, in replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

As shown in FIG. 19, the special part has 1 BB (type 1 big bonus) (part number “1”). Other special roles include 2BB (type 2 big bonus; also referred to as middle bonus (MB)), RB (regular bonus), SB (single bonus), etc. Is not provided.
The special part is a part to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When winning in 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the game, but it shifts from the next game to a 1BB game corresponding to a special game.
The 1BB game is an advantageous game for the player, who can expect medals to be obtained more than the normal game by setting the payout rate to exceed 1.

Also, Replay (replay role) is a role that enables replay with maintaining the number of medals inserted in the game (automatic bet on medals).
The replay according to the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 13 (combination numbers “2” to “77”), as shown in FIGS. Furthermore, for one replay, a combination of one or more symbols is provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, there are one kind of symbol combination of Replay 10 (combination number “73”). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, Replay 07 (role numbers “36” to “67”) has a combination of 32 types of symbols in total.

Replay 01 is called normal replay.
Also, Replay 02 is a kind of normal replay, and is a replay set so as to be won in duplicate as replay for shifting RT (referred to as “RT transition replay”).
Replays 03 to 06 are RT transition replays. The RT transition replay is a replay for transitioning from one RT to another RT in the game when the replay is won in the game. In the present embodiment, Replays 03 and 04 are replays (referred to as “dropping Replay” or “Punky Play”) to shift to an RT that is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RTs. On the other hand, Replays 05 and 06 are Replays (referred to as “promotion Replay”) to shift to an RT that is more advantageous to the player than the previous RTs.

Replay 07 is a replay that can be a so-called stop mode of middle row cherry ("cherry" symbol stop at middle left position). As a symbol of the left reel 31 of Replay 07, "White BAR" (role numbers "36" to "43") and "blank" (role numbers "60" to "67") are provided, but these symbols Stops at the effective line (lower left row), "Cherry" stops at the middle left row. In addition, at the time of winning combination numbers 52-59, "Cherry" stops on the effective line (lower left row). Furthermore, when winning combination numbers "44" to "51", "Cherry" does not appear in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped.
Replay 09 is a replay in which a combination of symbols used as chance eyes appears in the present embodiment. That is, at the time of winning of the condition device including the replay 09, an AT (during an AT, addition of the number of times of AT execution) is drawn.

Replays 10 to 13 have a role as a control replay, and are replays provided to increase the number of combinations of repeat winning combinations (the number of conditional devices), and the combination of the symbols is effective during the game. There is no stop on the line.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the combination of symbols for control replay may be stopped on the effective line. For example, when a specific condition device including control replay is won in a specific RT (for example, inside play), and the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order and a specific operation timing, the control replay It is possible to stop the combination of the symbols on the effective line.

  Also, the small winning combination, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, includes the small winning combination 01 to 24 (combination number “78” to “154”). In the column of the number of small payouts, etc., for example, "9 sheets / 9 sheets" in FIG. 23 means that a prize (1 BB in this embodiment) is not activated (i.e., not in 1 BB game). There is a payout of nine, and the prize winning at the time of bonus operation (i.e., during the 1BB game) means nine payouts.

The small part 01 to 08 are the part included in the so-called push order bell condition device, and when the push order bell condition device is won, the small part 01 or 02 (9-sheet payout high-order bell) is A prize is won, and the small winning combination 04 to 08 (a low payout bell for 1-sheet payout) is won in the wrong order.
The small part 09-20 is a part used to display a specific symbol (described later. Described in the part numbers "155" to "160"), and the correct answer is given when the condition device including the small part 09-20 is won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order, these small winning combinations are won, but when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pushing order, the small winning combination of these small winnings and the specific symbol are displayed Have a case.

The small part 21 to 23 is a so-called "watermelon part" (rare part), and when the small part 21 is won, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" stops in the middle middle stage (by pressing the middle line A "or" watermelon B "match.)
In addition, at the time of the small winning combination 22 winning, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped on the effective line.
Furthermore, at the time of the small winning combination 23 winning, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped at the lower left stage ("watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is aligned in the lower line due to eye pressing).
The so-called "cherry role" is not provided as a small role, and as described above, a replay in which "cherry" is stopped is provided.
The small part 24 is a part included in the condition device which is drawn only at the time of the item operation, that is, during the 1BB game.

  The specific symbol 01 to 03, as described above, is not a part itself but causes the RT to shift when the combination of symbols in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT2, RT3) stops on the effective line ( In this embodiment, it is a combination of symbols) which is shifted to RT1. As described above, it is displayed when the winning combination of the winning combination of the winning combination of the conditional device including at least one of the small combinations 09 to 20 can not be won.

In each combination mentioned above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination is not stopped on the activated line in the game won by the combination, the combination carried over to the next game and the combination not to be carried over are defined. .
The part carried over is a special part (1 BB in this embodiment). When a special combination is won, it is controlled to carry over the winning combination of the special combination after the next game in the game until the special combination is won.

  On the other hand, the winning of the special part is carried over, but the minor part and the replay other than the special part are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when the small winning combination or the replay is won, the winning combination becomes effective only in the game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game. That is, in the game in which these roles have been won, the reel 31 is stop-controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning roles can be won, but regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination, at the end of the game , The right concerning the winning combination disappears.

  And, during the game which is not elected special role (during the game where the winning of the special part is not carried over) is called "non-internal". In addition, a player who has won the special part in the game prior to the game but does not win the special part who has won (in the game in which the winning of the special part is carried over) is referred to as "inside".

  At the start of the game, the player operates the bet switch 40 to insert a previously stored medal, or inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 43 and operates (turns on) the start switch 41. When the start switch 41 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 60. When the main control board 60 (specifically, the reel control means 63g described later) receives this signal, the main control board 60 drives and controls all the motors 32 so as to rotate all the reels 31. The reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, and the symbols on the reel 31 are vertically displayed in the display window 11 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 60. When the main control board 60 (specifically, the reel control means 63g described later) receives this signal, the main control board 60 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to stop the reel 31 related to the motor 32 I do.

  Then, the game result of the game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any one of the winning combinations is stopped on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 60 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 63 of the main control board 60 includes the following setting change means 63 a and the like. In addition, each following means in this embodiment is an illustration, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The setting change unit 63a is a unit that changes and determines the setting value.
Here, the setting value defines the degree of advantage of the player, more specifically, the expected value (the medals that the player can obtain) of the payout number with respect to the inserted number of medals, and is set in the present embodiment. Six stages of 1 to 6 are provided.
The higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning at least some of the winning combinations (in particular, 1BB) is set, so that the player's advantage is set higher.
Further, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the AT.
The present invention is not limited to only increasing the probability of transitioning to the AT. For example, the probability of adding the number of games played or the number of payouts in the AT may be increased or the probability of continuing the AT may be increased.

In order to set or change the setting value, the power switch 51, the setting key switch 52, and the setting change / reset switch 53 are used.
In the present embodiment, after the power switch 51 is turned off and the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 52 is turned on. When the power switch 51 is turned on again in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting change mode is set. In this case, normal start-up processing is not performed. Therefore, the on / off operation of the power switch 51 is necessary to make the setting change.

In the setting change mode, the setting changing unit 63a displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 64.
In addition, the setting change unit 63a displays the setting value each time the setting change / reset switch 53 is operated (turned on) once, ... → "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2" → ... and so on.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on, the setting changing unit 63a determines the setting value by the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 64 at this time, and indicates “0” indicating that the setting value is determined Is displayed on the setting value display LED 64. The setting value determined here is stored as setting value data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61.
Then, the setting changing unit 63a turns the setting key counterclockwise 90 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 52, thereby making it possible to play a game with the setting value after the setting change.

In the present embodiment, the determination as to whether the setting key switch 52 is off is performed based on the fall data of the setting key switch 52, but the on / off state of the setting key switch 52 is set. It may be configured to be executed based on it.
Also, the configuration may be such that the game can not be performed with the setting value after the setting change unless the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot.
Furthermore, rotate the setting key counterclockwise 90 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 52, remove the setting key from the setting key insertion slot, and turn the power switch 51 off and on again in this state. It may be configured such that the game can not be performed with the setting value after the setting change.

Further, in a state in which no medal is bet and no lottery is performed (before the operation of the start switch 41), the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, and the setting key switch 52 is turned on. And "Confirmation of setting". That is, in the case of only confirming the set value, the on / off of the power switch 51 is unnecessary. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting display LED 64 as in the case of the setting change.
Furthermore, when the power switch 51 is turned on with the setting key switch 52 turned on, a reset, that is, an initialization process is performed. The initialization process will be described later.

The condition device lottery means 63b performs a lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (that is, the winning combination). Here, the “conditional device” is a target for a winning lottery consisting of one or more roles, and for example, when one conditional device is won (decided, selected), the role included in the conditional device is won.
Therefore, the condition device lottery means 63b is also referred to as a role lottery means, a winning combination determination (or selection) means, or the like.
In addition, “the winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a winning result of a winning combination, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.
Condition device lottery means 63b is based on, for example, random number generation means for lottery (hardware random number etc.), random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by this random number generation means, and random number values extracted by random number extraction means. And a determination unit that determines whether or not the condition device has been won and the condition device that has won the condition device. Such a lottery method is similar to the following AT lottery or the like.

  The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec continues counting as 1 cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player in the present embodiment at a predetermined time. The determination means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table described later to determine the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device “1” (replay A), it is determined that the winning and replay condition device “1” is won.

FIGS. 27 to 31 are diagrams showing types of condition devices selected by the condition device lottery means 63b and contents of winning combinations included in the respective condition devices.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pushing order and operation timing (gaze) when the condition device is won will be described by the reel control means 63g. .

The condition device of this embodiment is a condition device which does not carry over the winning information to the next game, and a "condition condition device" which is a condition device which can carry over the winning information to the next game. Become.
The winning and replay condition device corresponds to the winning of so-called small winning combination or replay, and includes winning and replay condition device numbers “1” to “51”.
Further, the item condition device corresponds to the winning of the special role (1BB in the present embodiment), and includes an item condition device number “1”.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the item and item condition device number “1” is a single winning of 1BB. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a double winning of 1BB and a small winning combination or replay. In this case, although the winning of 1BB is carried over, the small winning combination or replay that is dually won with 1BB is not carried over.
In the following description, the winning and replay condition device is simply referred to as a "condition device" when there is no risk of confusion with the item condition device or when both are collectively included.

First, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning of the part (so-called lost).
In addition, Replay A of the condition device number “1” is a normal Replay winning, and consists of Replays 01 and 02 (duplicate winning).
Replays B1 to B5 of the condition device numbers “2” to “6” correspond to RT transition replays, and all are duplicate wins of Replay 05 and Replay 01 and / or 02. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order, Replay 05 wins, and when the stop switch is operated in any other push order, Replay 01 or 02 wins.
In addition, in "Remarks" of Replays B1 to B5 and C1 to C5 in FIG. 27, the display of "(*)" indicates Replay for migrating (promoting) RT. For example, in Replay B1, when Replay 05 wins, RT shifts, and when Replay 01 or 02 wins, RT does not shift.
Furthermore, in FIG. 27 and thereafter, the numbers displayed in the remarks indicate the pressing order. The pushing order is indicated by “1” for the left stop switch 42, “2” for the middle stop switch 42, and “3” for the right stop switch 42.

Specifically, the pushing order is as follows.
123: left middle right 132: right and left middle 213: middle left and right 231: middle right left 312: right left middle 321: right middle left 1--: first stop left (second and third stops are optional. Ie left middle right and Means either left or right)
-1-: During the first stop (the second and third stops are optional, that is, either middle left or right middle)
-1: 1st stop right (2nd, 3rd stop is optional. That is, it means either right middle left or middle right middle)

In FIG. 27, Replays C1 to C5 of the condition device numbers “7” to “11” correspond to RT transition Replay, and all are duplicate wins of Replay 06 and Replay 03 and / or 04. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order, Replay 06 (RT transition replay) wins, and when the stop switch is operated in any other push order, Replay 03 or 04 wins.
In FIG. 28, the replays D1 to D3 of the condition device numbers "12" to "14" correspond to the RT transition replay, and each is a duplicate winning of replay 01 or 02 and replay 03 and / or 04.
When Replays D1 to D3 are won, Replay that maintains (does not shift) the current RT is Replay 01 or 02 (“(*)” in FIG. 28), and Replay 03 or 04 is Replay to fall the RT.

Replay E (weak cherry) of the condition apparatus number “15” is a single winning of replay 07, and as described above, “cherry” is displayed in the display window 11 by the eye pushing at the time of stopping the left reel 31 (in the embodiment, the left The lower part is a role that can appear. Specifically, any one of the combination numbers “44” to “51” in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 (“cherry” is not displayed stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped), or Control is performed to stop and display any of “” to “59” (“Cherry” is displayed stopped at the bottom when the left reel 31 is stopped).
Replay F (strong cherry) of the condition device number “16” is a duplicate winning of replays 07, 08, and 10, and as described above, “cherry” is displayed on the display window 11 by the eye stop when the left reel 31 is stopped. It is a role that can appear inside (in the left middle stage in the embodiment). Specifically, at the time of forward pressing, the same stop control as at the time of winning the conditional device number “15” is performed, but at the time of irregular pressing (the first stop is middle or right, and the pressing order after the second stop does not matter) In any of the part numbers “36” to “43” in FIGS. 21 and 22 (“Cherry” is stopped and displayed in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped), part numbers “44” to “51” One of them ("Cherry" is not displayed in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped. ") Any of the part numbers" 60 "to" 67 "(" Cherry "is stopped in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped. Control to stop display).

  Here, the conditional device number “15” (weak cherries) and the conditional device number “16” (strong cherries), for example, make the special combination (1BB) different in the number of winning combinations, or select the AT Stopping by increasing the possibility that it will be more advantageous for the player when the condition device number is determined to be “16” by making the storage number to be different to include the winning drawing during AT) different) The balance between the outcome and the game result (decision result) can be made appropriate.

Replays G1 to G3 (pushing order middle row cherries) of the condition device numbers “17” to “19” are the duplicate winnings of Replay 07 and Replay 01 and 02 (Other than that, include at least one of Replay 09 to 11) It is. When the replays G1 to G3 are won, the middle row cherry ("cherry" stop on the middle left) can be displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. In FIG. 28, “(*)” indicates Replay 07 that can be middle cherry.
Replays H1 to H3 of the condition device numbers “20” to “22” are duplicate wins including Replays 01 and 02 and Replay 09 (Otherwise, Replays 10 or 11 may be included). When the replays H1 to H3 are won, the replay 09 set for the chance can be stopped according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42. In FIG. 28, “(*)” indicates the replay 09 that is the chance eye.

  In FIG. 29, the small winning combinations A1 to A6, B1 to B6, and C1 to C6 of the condition device numbers "23" to "40" are all double winning combinations of a plurality of small winning combinations 01 to 08, so-called "push order It is a double winning equivalent to "Bell". Therefore, when the small winning combination A1 or the like is won, the high eye bell is won when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, and the low eye bell is awarded when the incorrect switch order is operated. In FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, “(*)” indicates nine bells that are high-order bells (one bell is a bell).

The small combination D of the condition device number “41” is a double winning combination of the small combinations 01 to 03 (all nine pieces), and the condition device for winning nine bells regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch Bell).
Condition device numbers “42” to “47” are duplicate winning combinations of a plurality of small winning combinations, and are condition devices that can display a specific symbol. In the present embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the specific push order, a specific symbol is made to appear when a small winning combination that can be won.

The small role F of the condition device number "48" is a so-called "weak watermelon" and is one of the rare roles. In the present embodiment, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" can be stopped at a straight line by eye-touching.
The small role G of the condition device number "49" is a so-called "strong watermelon" and is one of the rare roles. In this embodiment, at the time of winning the small part F (weak watermelon) and the small part G (strong watermelon), the AT lottery (additional lot drawing during AT) is performed, but the smaller part G is smaller A lottery is conducted under conditions that the AT winning probability is more advantageous to the player than at the time of winning. When the small winning combination G is won, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" can be stopped in a straight line by eye-opening as in the small winning combination F winning.

The small combination H of the condition device number “50” is a condition device for winning the small combination 07 or the small combination 08 which is positioned as the high chance eye. When the replays H1 to H3 (pushing order chance eyes) of the condition device numbers “20” to “22” mentioned above and the small combination H (strong chance eye) are won, the AT lottery (addition lottery during AT) is a line However, the lottery is performed under the condition that the AT winning probability is more advantageous to the player when the small winning combination H is won than when the replays H1 to H3 are winning.
As shown in FIG. 31, the small combination I of the condition device number “51” is a small combination (special combination) to be won during the RB game. The small role I is a double winning of all the small roles (small roles 01 to 24).
Further, 1BB of the item condition device number "1" is a single winning of the special role 1BB, and is a condition device in which the winning information is carried over to the next game until winning.

FIG. 32 shows the winning probability determined by the conditional device lottery table when the conditional device lottery is performed by the conditional device lottery means 63b, and shows the winning and replay condition devices for each RT and the winning probability (number). FIG. That is, FIG. 32 does not show the item condition device (condition device including 1 BB in the winning combination) and the winning probability thereof.
The condition device lottery table defines the winning probability of the condition device for each RT. The numerical value shown in FIG. 32 is a value for the digit number "65536". For example, the probability digit number "8938" in which the condition device number "1" (replay A) is not elected in non-RT (winning and replay) It indicates that the winning probability is "8938/65536".

First, in the non-RT, only Replay A is provided as a condition device corresponding to Replay win, and no other Replays are drawn.
In addition, in RTs other than RT5 (1BB game), Replay A is always drawn. Further, in RT1 to RT4, unique replays are drawn. As shown in FIG. 32, Replays B1 to B5 and Replays E and F are drawn at RT1, Replays C1 to C5 and Replays E and F are drawn at RT2, and Replays D1 to D3, E, F, G1 at RT3. G3 and H1 to H3 are drawn.

In RT5 (1 BB game), no replay is drawn.
Also, in terms of the combined winning probability of replay, non-RT is the lowest (except RT5), RT1 and RT2 are higher than non-RT (RT1 and RT2 have the same probability), and RT3 is the highest. Since RT3 is an RT that is controlled to stay in the AT, the winning probability of replay is set to the highest. Therefore, in the present embodiment, AT can be said to be ART (AT + RT (replay probability)).

The small winning combinations A1 to C6 corresponding to the pushing order bell and the other small winning combinations D to H are drawn at RT excluding RT5.
Small part I is drawn only at RT5. The winning probability of the small combination I at RT5 is “1” (65536/65536).
Although not shown in FIG. 32, since non-RT and RT1 to RT3 are not inside, condition devices including 1BB are drawn, but RT4 (inside) and RT5 (during 1BB playing) Condition devices containing 1BB will not be drawn.

In the conditional device lottery table, the conditional device including 1BB and the number thereof may be set as follows, for example.
(1) 1BB (single winning): unit number "40"
(2) 1BB + Replay E (weak cherry): unit number "20"
(3) 1BB + Replay F (strong cherry): unit number "90"
(4) 1BB + small role F (weak watermelon): unit number "25"
(5) 1BB + small role G (strong watermelon): unit number "65"
(6) 1BB + small role H (strong chance eyes): unit number "60"
Specifically, the case of 1BB single winning and the case where 1BB and a small winning combination, a replay, or a chance eye are double winning may be mentioned. In addition, it is possible to set a high probability that a strong cherries rather than weak cherries, a stronger watermelon than weak watermelons, and a stronger chance eye than a weak chance eye have a double winning with 1 BB at the time of winning.
In the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR), “0” is stored in the case of the above (1), “15” is stored in the case of the above (2), and the case of the above (3) Stores “16”, “48” in the case of the above (4), “49” in the case of the above (5), and “50” in the case of the above (6) Will be stored.
Although details will be described later, the effect group number and the push order instruction number are determined based on the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR), and the game in which the special part is won is also determined by the same processing.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control unit 63c controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the condition device lottery unit 63b. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the condition device lottery means 63b, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (a winning flag is set).

  For example, in a non-internal medium game, when the player wins the Replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the three winning flags of Replay 01, Replay 02, Replay 05 included in the condition device are turned on, and the other roles are played. The winning flag of is turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the winnings of the small winnings other than the special winning combination and the replay are not carried over, even if the small winnings or replays are won in the game and the winning flags of these playings are turned on, At the end, the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of the special part is carried over, when the special part is won in the game and the winning flag pertaining to the selected special part is once turned on, the on state is maintained until the special part is won. It is maintained and turned off when the special part is won.

For example, when the condition apparatus lottery means 63b wins 1BB of the item condition apparatus number "1", the 1BB selection flag is turned on in the game, and 1BB does not win in the game, the 1BB selection flag Is on.
Furthermore, in the next game, when winning a small combination A1 of the condition device number "23", in addition to 1BB carrying over the winning, a total of four winning flags of small combination 01, small combination 04, small combination 05 When the game is completed and 1BB does not win at the end of the game, the on flag of 1BB is kept on, and the winning flags of small part 01, small part 04 and small part 05 are turned off.

AT lottery means 63d is a predetermined RT (in the present embodiment, non-RT, RT1 to RT3, RT5, RT4 does not have an AT lottery). When the player is elected, the AT lottery (including the lottery of the first hit stock number) is performed.
In this embodiment, the AT lottery (lottery of initial stock number) is performed in non-RT, RT1 to RT3 when the AT is not won. In addition, during the AT, a lottery will be conducted to increase the stock number of the AT.
In this embodiment, as the AT lottery state when AT is not elected, it is provided with low probability, normal, and high probability that the probability of winning AT is different, and the AT lottery means 63 d selects The above low confidence, usually high confidence, and precursor transitions are determined by lottery. Here, the time when it is decided to shift to the precursor corresponds to the AT winning (the first hit).

  Furthermore, in RT5 (1BB game to be described later), a lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each game. In RT5, regardless of the condition device that has won, a lottery may be made with every game at a predetermined probability, or a lottery may be made with a predetermined probability based on the condition device that has won. In this embodiment, based on the winning of the condition device number “51” (wining probability “1”), the AT lottery to be won with the probability of “1/50” is executed.

FIG. 33 shows an AT lottery table used by the AT lottery means 63d.
In this embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1 to RT3, as a result of the lottery by the conditional device lottery means 63b, the condition devices “1”, “15” to “22”, “41” and “48” to “50” are won. When it is done, a transition lottery of AT lottery state (also serving as AT lottery) is performed. In FIG. 33, for example, when the condition device number “15” (weak cherry) is won during high probability during non-AT, transition to the low probability with the probability of “1/50”, probability of “1/50” And transition to the precursor with a probability of "1/50" (ie, won the AT).

The normal replay of the winning and replay condition device number “1” is positioned as a condition device in which the AT lottery state falls. In addition, the weak cherry of the conditional device “15” has a case where the AT lottery state falls or is promoted, or a case of transitioning to a sign (to win the AT).
Furthermore, the conditional devices "16" to "22", "41" and "48" to "50" are so-called rare roles, and the AT lottery state is promoted or shifted to a sign (the AT is won). B) corresponding to the condition device having the possibility.
Furthermore, during the 1BB game (RT5), the AT lottery is executed so as to be won with the probability of "1/50". When the AT lottery is won during the 1BB game, the AT lottery may not be performed during the subsequent 1BB game, or the AT lottery may be continued.

Furthermore, the AT lottery means 63d executes a lottery of AT stock number at the same time when AT is won. There are various modes in the AT stock number lottery. For example, “1 (one shot)” is “4/10”, “2” is “2/10”, etc. Can be mentioned. The number of stocks is made different depending on the AT lottery state of winning, the condition device that is the trigger of winning, etc. (Detailed explanation will be omitted).
In addition, when winning the so-called rare role during AT, a lottery for addition (addition) of AT stock number is performed.

The pushing order instruction number selecting means 63e selects the pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the condition device drawing means 63b.
FIG. 34 shows a push order instruction number table. In the figure, (A) shows the data configuration of the push order designation number table, and (B) shows the relationship between the address stored in the ROM 62 and the data.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34A, each of the (winning and replay) condition devices “0” to “51” is provided with a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number “1” (replay A) is “0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number “28” (small combination A6) is “ 6 ".

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number and the push order advantageous to the player. The push order instruction number “0” does not have a push order that is advantageous to the player (the push order does not cause an advantage / convenience, ie, the push order is not relevant).
The push order instruction numbers “1” to “9” each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, an advantageous pushing order corresponding to pushing order instruction number "2" is 132 (right and left middle), and an advantageous pushing order corresponding to pushing order instruction number "9" is right first stop (right and left middle, Or right, middle, left).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “pushing order advantageous to the player” corresponds to the following pushing order, and corresponds to the pushing order marked with “*” in FIGS.
(1) Replay duplicate winning combination (condition device numbers "2" to "14"), push order to promote RT or push order to maintain favorable RT (push order not to fall to disadvantageous RT)
(2) Pushing order bell (condition device numbers "23" to "40") winning order, winning order bell (9 sheets) winning order (3) Pushing order middle-stage cherry (condition device number "17" to "19 The winning order to win Replay 07 (Middle Cherry) at the winning) (4) Pushing order chance (condition device number “20” to “22”) Winning the winning order for Replay 09 (Chance)

  The push order designation number table is stored in the storage area of the ROM 62 as shown in FIG. That is, the top address of the push order instruction number table is set to “1 EDC”, and the push order instruction numbers when winning (winning and replay) condition device numbers “0” to “51” are set in the address order from “1 EDC” It is memorized.

Then, for example, when the conditional device number "10" is won, the conditional device number "10" is used as an offset value, and an address ahead of the head address "1EDC" of the push order designation number table by "10", ie By reading the data of the address of, the pressing order instruction number “4” corresponding to the condition device number “10” is acquired.
In the present embodiment, after the lottery for the condition device is performed for each game, when the game is in the pushing order instructing state (when “Yes” in step S214 of FIG. 52 described later), the winning condition Obtain a push order instruction number corresponding to the device.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every game, the pressing order instruction number may be acquired uniformly, and may be transmitted to the sub control board 80 when in the pressing order instruction state (during AT).

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 63f is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
It is also conceivable to transmit the condition apparatus information itself that has won as a result of the lottery of the condition apparatus to the sub control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the selected conditional device information itself is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Thus, the sub control board 80 can not know the condition number won in the game.
On the other hand, on the main control board 60 side, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving the effect group number selected in the game, the sub control board 80 can select and output an effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 36 shows a presentation group number table. In the figure, (A) shows the data configuration of the effect group number table, and (B) shows the relationship between the address stored in the ROM 62 and the data.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36A, unique effect group numbers are provided for each of the (winning and replay) condition devices “0” to “51”. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number "23" (small combination A1) to "28" (small combination A6) is defined as "13".

Therefore, when the main control board 60 wins the condition device number "23" as a result of the condition device lottery, the main control substrate 60 selects "13" as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “13” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Upon receiving the information that the effect group number is “13”, the sub control board 80 can know that one of the small roles A (push order bell) has been won in the game. Thereby, it is possible to output a bell winning effect. However, even if the sub control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number "13" has been won, the pushing order (correct pushing order) advantageous to the player does not receive the pushing order instruction number. I can not know. And, in the present embodiment, the advantageous push order is transmitted to the sub control board 80 during AT, but not during non-AT. Therefore, during AT, it is possible to output the effect of winning the small part A (Bell) and the pushing order advantageous to the advantage as an effect, but during non-AT, the effect of winning the small part A (Bell) It is not possible to stay in the stage and output the order of push which is advantageous to the advantage as the stage.

Further, even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80, different effects can be output because the effect group numbers are different. For example, the push order instruction number is “1” (left middle right) when the player wins replay C1 (condition device number 7), and the push order instruction number when the minor winning combination A1 (condition device number 23) is elected is In this case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80, since it is “1” (left, middle and right).
However, when the replay C1 (condition device number 7) is won, the effect group number "3" is transmitted, and when the small winning combination A1 (condition device number 23) is elected, the effect group number "13" is transmitted. Therefore, when the effect group number "3" is transmitted, for example, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order using blue indicating the replay, and when the effect group number "13" is transmitted, for example, the bell is transmitted. It is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using yellow indicating.

Furthermore, in the storage area of the ROM 62, it is stored as shown in FIG. That is, the top address of the effect group number table is set to “1E53”, and (winning and replay) the condition device numbers “0” to “51” and the feature condition device number “1” in the address order from “1E53”. The effect group number (data) at the time of winning is stored.
Then, for example, when the condition device number “10” is won, the condition device number “10” is used as an offset value, and the leading address “1E53” of the effect group number table is “10” ahead of the start address, ie By reading the data of the address, the effect group number “3” of the condition device number “10” is acquired.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 63g starts all (three) reels 31 to rotate when receiving an instruction to start rotation of the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. Control. Furthermore, the reel control means 63g determines the stop position corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag by referring to the on / off of the winning flag in the game after the condition device lottery means 63b performs the drawing of the conditional device. While the table is selected, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is selected. The drive control is performed to control the reel 31 to stop at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 63g sets a combination of symbols corresponding to winning combinations (combinations in which the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. In addition to stop control of the reel 31 so as to be able to stop on the effective line, stop control of the reel 31 so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the roles other than the winning combination (combinations in which the winning flag is off) .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving pieces (symbols)) It means within the range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 is stopped is set to four.

  For example, in FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "watermelon A" of the left reel 31 is positioned at the middle left, four frames ahead, that is, the fifth "cherry" is It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle left. Therefore, at the above-mentioned operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bit stop) to No. 5 (4 komasubi) become symbols that can be stopped in the middle left.

  Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated when one of the symbols within the stop control range of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected. In addition, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol relating to the winning combination is not stopped at the predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of (1), it is controlled to stop the symbol relating to the winning combination on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will stop on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel is stopped. By rotating and controlling the reel 31 within the range of stop control 31, control is performed so as not to stop the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination not winning the winning line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations have been won, the priority of winning combinations is determined in advance in accordance with the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the operation timing of the stop switch 42, etc. Performs the stop stop control of the most prioritized symbol.

Further, the reel control means 63g detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 63g detects which of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the player operates the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 63g. By determining this signal, the reel control means 63g detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 63g is provided with a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("Watermelon A" in the case of the left reel 31) passes the middle step, the number of symbols is controlled to move The stop position is determined in advance, such as stopping the number of symbols in the middle, and the number of symbols.

Here, the pull-in rate (PB) will be described.
For example, the symbol concerning 1BB is "black BAR" in all reels 31 (FIG. 19). Then, as shown in FIG. 17, one “black BAR” is provided for each reel 31 (every 18th). Therefore, the player can not stop the "black BAR" at the active line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "black BAR" stops at the active line.

  As described above, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate reel 31 position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols), the target symbol is stopped at the effective line. The fact that it can not be (pulled to the effective line) is referred to as "PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1".

  On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. , “PB = 1”.

And "PB = 1" has a case where all the reels 31 have become such and a case having become so as to only a specific (partial) reel 31 for the part.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving frame number is "4", so when the target symbol is arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1", which exceeds 5 symbols When arranged at intervals of 6 symbols or more, "PB ≠ 1".

For example, in FIG. 17, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is disposed at the fifth and tenth. Therefore, the “cherry” of the left reel 31 is in the “PB ≠ 1” arrangement.
On the other hand, the "bells" of the left reel 31 are arranged at the second, seventh, twelfth and seventeenth. That is, four are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the "bell" of the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
As shown in FIG. 17, the “bell” is also in the “PB = 1” arrangement in the middle and right reels 31.

Further, “Replay A” of the middle reel 31 is arranged as “PB = 1”.
Furthermore, “Replay A” of the right reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement. Similarly, “Replay B” of the right reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, in the left reel 31, "Replay A" is in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. Similarly, “Replay B” of the left reel 31 is also arranged as “PB ≠ 1”.
However, on the left reel 31, in the addition of "Replay A" and "Replay B", the arrangement is "PB = 1". That is, either "Replay A" or "Replay B" is arranged at five symbol intervals.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in the game when the winning and replay condition device number "0" is won (when the winning is not won), so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winnings does not stop on the active line. It defines the combination of symbols at the time of stop.
The Replay A table is used when winning and replay condition device number “1” is won (duplicate winning of Replays 01 and 02), and causes Replay 01 or 02 to stop on the active line within the range of stop control of the reel 31. In addition, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. In this case, the combination of symbols in any of the combination numbers "2" to "12" is stopped at the effective line in FIG.
Also, the Replay A table stops Replay 01 or 02 on the active line, regardless of pressing order. Furthermore, Replay 01 and 02 are both set to “PB = 1”.

In this case,
(1) Stop Replay 01 in full push order (2) Stop Replay 02 in full push order (3) Stop Replay 01 when stop switch 42 is operated in specific push order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order other than the order, the replay 02 may be stopped.
First, when the Replay 01 is to be stopped at the effective line, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon B” or “bell” excluding the number 17 is stopped at the effective line (lower left stage). Even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at any operation timing, it is possible to stop the “bell” except “watermelon B” or No. 17 at the effective line (lower left stage). As a result, "Replay A" or "Replay B" is stopped at the left middle row.

  Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped at the effective line (middle middle stage). Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (upper right). The inner and right reels 31 both have “PB = 1”. When "BELL" is stopped on the effective line (upper right stage) when the right reel 31 is stopped, "REPLAY A" is stopped at the middle right stage. Therefore, at the time of winning of Replay 01, “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A”-“Replay A” is stopped on the middle line (invalid line).

  Further, in the case of stopping Replay 02 at the effective line, when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of “Black BAR”, “Replay A”, and “Watermelon A” is stopped at the effective line (lower left stage). However, No. 3 and No. 8 "Replay A" are controlled not to stop on the effective line. In the left reel 31, since "watermelon A" is disposed at the first, sixth and eleventh, it is possible not to stop the third and eighth "Replay A" on the effective line. Thereby, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay A" or "Replay B" is stopped at the upper left stage.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, any one of "red 7", "black BAR" and "cherry" can be stuck in the effective line (middle middle). However, control is made so as not to stop 0, 5 and 10 "Cherry" on the effective line. By stopping the 18th "Black BAR", the 3rd "Cherry", the 8th "Cherry" and the 13th "Red 7" on the effective line, the 0th, 5th and 10th "Cherry" It is possible not to stop on the effective line. As a result, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Replay A" is stopped at the middle and upper stages.
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (upper right part) (PB = 1).
As mentioned above, at the time of winning of Replay 02, "Replay A / Replay B"-"Replay A"-"Replay B" is stopped on the upper line (invalid line).

The replay B1 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “2” is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the pushing order “left middle right”, the replay 05 is stopped at the effective line, “middle left At the time of pushing order other than “right”, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 02 on the effective line (see FIG. 27).
First, when the Replay 05 is to be won, when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of “Black BAR”, “Replay A” and “Watermelon A” is stopped at the effective line (lower left part). However, No. 3 and No. 8 "Replay A" are controlled not to stop on the effective line. By stopping the "watermelon A" of No. 1, 6, or 11 on the activated line, it is possible not to stop the "Replay A" of Nos. 3 and 8 on the activated line.
By this stop control, “Replay A” or “Replay B” is stopped at the upper left corner when the left reel 31 is stopped.

Further, “Replay A” of the middle reel 31 and “watermelon A” of the right reel are both arranged in “PB = 1”. In addition, when “watermelon A” of the right reel 31 is stopped at the effective line (upper right), “Replay B” is stopped at the lower right.
As described above, in the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left middle, right middle pressing order, Replay 05 is won with “PB = 1”. Furthermore, when Replay 05 is won, "Replay A / Replay B"-"Replay A"-"Replay B" is stopped on the invalid line of "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right row".
Further, as described above, since Replay 02 is “PB = 1”, Replay 02 always wins in the order of pushing other than left, middle, and right. When making Replay 02 win in the order of pushing other than “left middle right”, it is the same as the stop control at the time of Replay 02 winning described above.

The Replay B2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “3” is won (Replay 01, 02, 05, 10 when it is double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “in the left and right” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 05 at the effective line, and to stop the replay 02 at the effective line when pushing order other than “left middle right”.
Also, the Replay B3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “4” is won (replays 01, 02, 05, 11 when duplicates are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “middle left and right "Replay 05 will be stopped at the effective line," First left stop or pushing order "right / left middle" will stop Replay 01 at the effective line, and Right at the first stop will stop Replay 02 at the effective line, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

Furthermore, the Replay B4 table is used in the game when the condition device number "5" is won (when duplicates of Replays 01, 02, 05, 12 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order "Medium" is to stop Replay 05 on the active line, stop Replay 01 on the active line when left first stop or pushing order "middle left and right", and stop Replay 02 on the active line when right first stop , The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
Furthermore, the Replay B5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “6” is won (when duplicates of Replays 01, 02, 05, 13 are won), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the first right stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop Replay 05 at the effective line, stop Replay 01 at the effective line at the first left stop, and stop Replay 02 at the effective line at the first middle stop. It is.

In the above Replay B2 to Replay B5 tables, the stop control at the time of Replay 01, 02 or 05 winning is the same as the Replay B1 table.
As described above, in the replay B1 to B5 tables, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined such that the replay 05 is won in a specific push order, and the replay 01 or 02 is won in a push order other than the specific push order. ing. As will be described later, when Replay 05 wins in RT1, it shifts to RT2 (promotion). Therefore, when one of the replays B1 to B5 is won during the RT1 game, if the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, the replay 05 can be made to win a prize and it can be shifted to RT2 and the other specific When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order, RT1 is maintained without shifting to RT2.
It should be noted that, when the conditional device numbers “3” to “6” are won, the replays 10 to 13 included in the winning combination do not win when the conditional device is won. These replays 10 to 13 are used to increase the duplicate winning patterns of replays 01, 02, 05 (control replay).

The replay C1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “7” is won (when duplicate replays 03, 04, 06 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “left middle right” The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the Replay 06 at the active line, stop the Replay 04 at the active line at “right and left middle” or middle first stop, and win the Replay 03 at the first right stop. It is
First, when Replay 06 is to be won, “Black BAR”, “Watermelon A”, and “Replay A” on the left reel 31 are “PB = 1” in total, so it is always on the active line (lower left). It is possible to stop any of these symbols. When "Black BAR" is stopped at the lower left, "Replay B" is stopped at the upper left. Also, when "watermelon A" is stopped at the lower left stage, "Replay A" is stopped at the upper left stage.

Also, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the effective line (middle middle stage) (PB = 1). Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the effective line (upper right part) (PB = 1). When "Replay B" stops on the active line when the right reel 31 stops, "Replay A" stops at the lower right.
Therefore, at the time of winning on Replay 06, "Replay A"-"Replay A"-"Replay B" is stopped on the activated line, or "upper left"-"middle middle"-"right" which is an invalid line to the right In the lower part, "Replay A / Replay B"-"Replay A"-"Replay A" is stopped.

Further, in the case of winning the Replay 04, when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of “Black BAR”, “Replay A” and “Watermelon A” is stopped at the effective line (lower left stage). However, No. 3 and No. 8 "Replay A" are controlled not to stop on the effective line. By stopping the "watermelon A" of No. 1, 6, or 11 on the activated line, it is possible not to stop the "Replay A" of Nos. 3 and 8 on the activated line.
By such stop control, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” or “Replay B” is stopped in the upper left column.

In addition, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either “red 7”, “black BAR” or “cherry” is stopped on the effective line (middle middle stage). Since the middle reel 31 is arranged as “PB = 1” in these three symbol additions, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols on the effective line (middle middle). As a result, "Replay A" is stopped in the middle and upper stages.
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the effective line (upper right part) (PB = 1).
As described above, Replay 04 wins, and “Replay A / Replay B” − “Replay A” − “Replay A” is stopped on the upper line (invalid line).

Further, in the case of winning the Replay 03, when the left reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell” or “Watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (lower left stage). However, the 17th "bell" is controlled not to stop on the effective line. By stopping the No. 14 or No. 19 "Watermelon B" on the active line, it is possible not to stop the No. 17 "Bell" on the active line.
By such stop control, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay A" or "Replay B" is stopped in the middle left.

Also, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the effective line (middle middle stage) (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR” or “blank” is stopped at the effective line (upper right). Since these four designs are “PB = 1” arrangement in addition, it is possible to always stop any of these designs on the effective line. When one of these symbols stops on the active line, "Replay B" stops in the middle right.
Thus, Replay 03 is won, and “Replay A / Replay B”-“Replay A”-“Replay B” is stopped on the middle line (invalid line).

The Replay C2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “8” is won (Replay 03, 04, 06, 10 when the duplicate is won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “in the left and right” The reel 31 is configured to stop Replay 06 at the active line, stop Replay 04 at the active line at “left middle right” or middle first stop, and stop Replay 03 at the active line at right first stop. The stop position of the
In addition, the replay C3 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “9” is won (when duplicate replays 03, 04, 06, 11 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “middle left and right At the time, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the Replay 06 at the effective line and to stop the Replay 03 at the effective line except for the pressing order “middle left and right”.

Furthermore, the Replay C4 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “10” is won (when the Replays 03, 04, 06, 12 are doubled), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the pushing order “right left When "M" is selected, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop Replay 06 at the effective line and stop Replay 03 at the effective line except for the pushing order "right and left middle".
Furthermore, the replay C5 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “11” is won (when duplicate replays 03, 04, 06, 13 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first right stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop Replay 06 at the active line, stop Replay 03 at the active line at the first left stop, and stop Replay 04 at the active line at the first middle stop. It is.

In the above Replay C2 Table to Replay C5 Table, the stop control at the time of Replay 03, 04, or 06 winning is the same as the Replay C1 table.
As described above, in the replay C1 to C5 tables, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined such that the replay 06 is won in a specific push order and the replay 03 or 04 is won in a push order other than the specific push order. ing. As described later, when Replay 06 wins in RT2, it shifts to RT3 (promotion). Therefore, when one of the replays C1 to C5 is won during the RT2 game, if the stop switch is operated in a specific push order, the replay 06 can be made to win and be shifted to RT3, and the other specific When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order, it does not shift to RT3, but shifts (falls) to RT1.
Note that, when the condition device numbers “8” to “11” are won, the replays 10 to 13 included in the winning combination do not win when the condition device is won. These replays 10 to 13 are used as control replays in order to increase the repetition winning patterns of replays 03, 04, 06.

The replay D1 table is used in the game when the condition device number “12” is won (when duplicate replays 01, 02, 03, 04 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay is performed when the left first stop is performed. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop 01 at the effective line, stop Replay 04 at the effective line at the middle first stop, and stop Replay 03 at the effective line at the right first stop. .
Also, the Replay D2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “13” is won (when duplicates of Replays 01, 02, 03, 04, 10 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the middle first At the stop time, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 02 at the effective line and to stop the replay 03 at the effective line at the left or right first stop.

  Furthermore, the replay D3 table is used in the game when the conditional device number "14" is won (when duplicate replays 01, 02, 03, 04, 11 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the right Stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop Replay 02 at the effective line at the time of one stop, stop Replay 03 at the effective line at the time of the first left stop, and stop Replay 04 at the effective line at the middle first stop. It was decided.

In the Replay D1 to Replay D3 tables described above, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that Replay 01 or 02 is won in a specific push order, and Replay 03 or 04 is won in a push order other than a specific push order. It has established. As will be described later, if Replay 01 or 02 wins in RT3, RT3 is maintained, but if Replay 03 or 04 wins, it shifts (falls) to RT1.
In the Replay D1 to Replay D3 tables, the stop control for winning the Replays 01, 02, 03, 04 is the same as described above.

  The Replay E table is used in the game when the condition device number “15” is won (when Replay 07 is won alone), and the reel 31 is stopped so as to stop Replay 07 at the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is a stop position determination table for stopping the so-called "weak cherry" (in fact, it is a replay) in appearance. In the Replay E table, the pushing order is not important.

Here, the "weak cherry" refers to the stop point at which the "cherry" is stopped in the upper left stage or the lower left stage when the left reel 31 stops. On the other hand, as described later, "strong cherries" refers to the stopping eyes at the center left of the left reel 31 at the time of stopping the left reel 31.
In the game where "Cherry" can be stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is stopped in the display window 11 when the left reel 31 is stopped. It points to the stop point when there was no.
In a game in which the condition device number “15” is won and the replay E table is used, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so as to make the stop number of weak cherry appear.
The symbol combination of Replay 07 has 32 types of combination numbers “36” to “67” (FIG. 21 and FIG. 22).

And in this embodiment, at the time of the stop of the left reel 31, in the replay E table, the symbol to be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line (lower left stage) with the first priority is determined as "cherry". Also, "Replay B" is set as the second priority.
If "cherry" is stopped on the effective line (lower left step) when the left reel 31 is stopped, it looks like a so-called weak cherry (corn cherry) (it is actually a replay).
In addition, if "Replay B" is stopped on the effective line (lower left step) when the left reel 31 is stopped, it looks like "Cherry pill" (in fact, the replay wins with "PB = 1") .

In the left reel 31, since "Cherry" and "Replay B" are in the "PB = 1" arrangement in addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols on the active line.
Furthermore, in the middle reel 31, the “red 7” and the “cherry” are in the “PB = 1” arrangement (the middle reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement for the “cherry” alone). ), You can always stop any of these symbols on the active line.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, since "Red 7", "Black BAR", "White BAR" and "Blank" are in the "PB = 1" arrangement in these four symbol additions, any of these symbols is always present. Can be stopped on the effective line.

As described above, Replay 07 can be won by stopping "Cherry / Replay B"-"Red 7 / Cherry"-"Red 7 / Black BAR / White BAR / Blank" on the effective line.
Therefore, in the game in which the replay E table is used, “white BAR” or “blank” is not stopped on the activated line (lower left stage) when the left reel 31 is stopped. As a result, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" (so-called "middle cherry" in appearance) is not stopped in the middle left.

  The Replay F table is used in the game when the condition device number “16” is won (Replay 07, 08 or 10), and any of Replay 07, 08 or 10 is valid within the range of stop control of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop on the line, and the so-called "strong cherry" is stopped on the appearance (in fact, it is a replay). However, as described later, it may be the appearance of weak cherry without the appearance of strong cherry. Also, in the replay F table, the pushing order is not important.

In a game where a Replay F table is used, at the time of the first left stop (at the time of forward press), similar to Replay E Table, by stopping “Cherry” or “Replay B” in the lower left row, Control is made to stop the weak cherry (replay 07 wins with "PB = 1"). The first left stop (forward press) when the Replay F table is used is the same as the stop control in the Replay E table, so the description will be omitted.
On the other hand, when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is made to stop the "Cherry" at the middle left and stop the "Strong Cherry" on the appearance when the left reel 31 is stopped at the time of the first stop during medium or right .

For example, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at the time of irregular pressing, "cherry" is stopped at the effective line ("PB = 1"). Also, when the right reel 31 is stopped at the time of irregular pressing, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” are stopped. In this stop form, any one of the part numbers "40" to "43", "48" to "51", "56" to "59", and "64" to "67" can be stopped.
Next, when the left reel 31 stops at the time of irregular pressing, priority is given to stopping “white BAR” or “blank” at the effective line (lower left stage) (first priority). When “White BAR” or “Blank” is stopped on the effective line (lower left row), “High Cherry” stops and the Replay 07 wins.

Here, “white BAR” and “blank” are “PB ≠ 1” in addition. Therefore, when the "white BAR" or the "blank" can not be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 stops at the irregular pressing, the "replay B" is stopped as the second priority. In the left reel 31, “PB = 1” is arranged by adding “White BAR”, “Blank” and “Replay B” (No. 4, No. 9, No. 14, No. 19). Therefore, "Replay B" can be stopped at the lower left stage whenever "white BAR" or "Blank" can not be stopped at the lower left stage.
From the above, in the irregular push when the replay F table is used, it becomes an eye of "strong cherry" or "a cherry missing eye".

The replay G1 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “17” is won (when duplicate replays 01, 02, 07, 10 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the left or middle first stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 07 at the effective line and stop the replay 02 at the effective line at the first right stop.
Replays G1 to G3 as condition devices are referred to as push order middle stage cherry, and when the push order is correct, the appearance middle stage cherry (strong cherry) can be stopped, and when push order incorrect solution, “cherry” is displayed (display window It is the one that performs stop control (it is a cherry dropout) with non-stop.
In FIG. 28, in the replays G1 to G3 of the condition device numbers "17" to "19", the "*" mark is the correct pressing order and the replay 07 is won, and the other is the incorrect pressing order and the replay 01 Or win 02. For example, when the replay G1 is won, the left or middle first stop is the correct pressing order, and the right first stop is set in the incorrect pressing order.

In the game in which the Replay G1 table is used, when it is in the correct pressing order (left or middle first stop), Replay 07 is stopped on the active line, and when the left reel 31 is stopped as in Replay F Table. Priority to stop "white BAR" or "blank" on the active line. This makes it possible to stop the apparent middle stage cherry. In addition, when "white BAR" or "blank" can not be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" or "replay B" is stopped on the effective line as in the replay F table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pushing order is incorrect (first right stop), the replay 02 is controlled to win. The stop control at the time of Replay 02 winning is the same as that in the Replay A table.

The Replay G2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “18” is won (Replays 01, 02, 07, 11 when duplicates are won), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the middle or right first stop time The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 07 is stopped at the effective line (when the correct order is pressed) and the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (the incorrect order of pushing). is there.
The stop control at the time of Replay 07 winning is similar to the Replay G1 table. In addition, the stop control at the time of Replay 01 winning is similar to that in the Replay A table.
Similarly, the replay G3 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “19” is won (when duplicate replays 01, 02, 07, 10, 11 are won), and left or within the range of stop control of the reel 31 Stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop Replay 07 on the active line at the time of first right stop (during correct pressing) and stop Replay 02 at the effective line at the time of medium first stop (due to incorrect order of pressing). Are defined.

The stop control at the time of Replay 02 and 07 winning is the same as described above.
As described above, in the replay G1 to G3 tables, the middle cherry can be stopped by winning the replay 07 in a specific push order (in the correct push order), and in the push order other than the specific push order, the replay 01 Or it is something which is made not to stop the middle stage cherry by making 02 win,
In Replays G1 to G3, Replays 10 and 11 included in the winning combination are Replays used for control, and are Replays that do not win when Replay G1 to Replay G3 tables are used.

  The replay H1 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “20” is won (when duplicate replays 01, 02, and 09 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first left stop (pushing order correct) At the time) stop Replay 09 on the active line, stop Replay 02 on the active line at the middle first stop (press order incorrect answer), and at the right first stop (press order incorrect answer) Replay 01 The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the stop line is stopped at the effective line.

The combination of symbols of Replay 09 is "Bell"-"Replay A"-"Replay B" as shown in part number "72" of FIG. 22, and each reel 31 is a symbol of "PB = 1" arrangement. is there. Therefore, Replay 09 can always be won when the pushing order is correct.
In addition, stop control at the time of Replay 01 and 02 winning is the same as Replay A table.
Also in the following Replay H2 Table and Replay H3 Table, the stop control at the time of Replay 01, 02, 09 winning is similar to the Replay H2 table.

Also, the Replay H2 table is used in the game when the condition device number “21” is won (when duplicates of Replays 01, 02, 09, 10 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the middle first stop time The stop position of the reel 31 has been defined so that the replay 09 is stopped at the effective line (when the correct order is pressed) and the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left or right first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect). It is a thing.
Furthermore, the Replay H3 table is used in the game when the conditional device number “22” is won (when duplicate Replays 01, 02, 09, 11 are won), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first right stop When Replay 09 is stopped on the active line (when pressing order is correct), Replay 01 is stopped on the active line when left first stop (when pressing order is incorrect), and during middle first stop (when pressing order is incorrect) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 02 on the effective line.

  As described above, in Replay H1 to Replay H3 tables, Replay 09 is awarded when the pressing order is correct, and Replay 01 or 02 is awarded when the pressing order is incorrect. Replay 09 is regarded as a chance in this embodiment. In the replays H1 to H3, a lottery is made during the RT3 (generally AT), and when the replays H1 to H3 are won, an AT (stock number) additional lottery is conducted. Therefore, when Replay 09 appears during AT, it has the possibility of AT addition.

As described above, small players A1 to C6 (condition device numbers "23" to "40") win so-called push order bells, and when these condition devices are won, their specific stop positions are determined as described below The reels 31 are stop-controlled using a table.
The small winning combination A1 table is used in the game when the condition device "23" is won (small winning combination 01, 04, 05 double winning), and "left middle right" (displayed as "123" in FIG. 29) When the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order, the small part 01 which is the 9-piece winning combination is won by number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in incorrect pressing order other than "left middle right", The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small combination 04 or 05, which is one combination, is won by number priority.

Here, as a method of stopping control of the reel 31 in a case where a plurality of small winning combinations are simultaneously won (duplicate winning), the following method may be mentioned.
As a first priority, when it is possible to stop all of the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the combination of winning symbols on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all symbols that make up the combination of winning symbols on the activated line" (when it is not possible to adopt the first priority), the "number of sheets priority" is given as the second priority. The stop control of the reel 31 is performed by either "or number priority".
Here, “number priority” means that the symbols of the reel 31 that make up the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts among the combinations of the symbols winning in duplicate are preferentially stopped (drawn) in the effective line Say For this reason, at the time of winning the small winning combinations A1 to C6, the low winning combinations 01 to 03 correspond to the combination of the symbols with the largest payout number.
On the other hand, "number priority" means stopping the symbols of the reel 31 on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is the largest.

When the condition device "23" is won, for example, at the left first stop, it is impossible to simultaneously stop all the left reels 31 associated with the winning combination on the activated line. While there are a plurality of types of symbols on the left reel 31 of the small part 01, 04, 05, there is only one valid line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the valid line.
Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination 1 table is used, the reels 31 are stop-controlled by either number priority or number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped by giving priority to the number when the pressing order is incorrect. In the present embodiment, when stop control of the reel is given by number priority, the 9-piece winning combination is configured so that the 1-piece winning combination is not won.
In the following tables A2 to C6, as well as in the above, control is made to win 9 combinations of winning combinations by priority on the number of sheets when the pressing order is correct. Control to win a one-piece role.

In the game in which the small winning combination A1 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, it is the pressing order correct at that time. Therefore, since the symbol of the left reel 31 related to the small part 01 which is the nineteen-piece combination is "bell" by priority of the number of sheets, the "bell" is stopped at the lower left stage.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, the correct order of pushing is decided at this point. Therefore, one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B” and “blank”, which is the symbol of the middle reel 31 of the small part 01, is stopped at the effective line (middle middle). In the middle reel 31, since “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” are arranged at five symbol intervals, the “PB = 1” arrangement is added in total. Therefore, it is possible to always stop any of these four designs on the effective line.
In addition, when "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", or "blank" is stopped in the middle and middle stages, the "bell" is stopped in the middle and lower stages.

After the first left stop and the second middle stop, at the third right stop, one of “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” is stopped at the effective line (upper right stage). In the right reel 31, since "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", and "blank" are 5 symbol spacing arrangements, they are "PB = 1" arrangement in total. Therefore, it is possible to always stop any of these four designs on the effective line.
When "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR" or "blank" is stopped in the upper right row, "bell" is stopped in the lower right.
As mentioned above, at the time of prize winning of the small part 01, "BELL"-"BELL"-"BELL" stops at the lower line (invalid line).

After the left first stop, at the right second stop, the pressing order incorrectness is determined at this second stop time.
Here, the combination of the symbols of the small combination 04 or 05 in which the symbol of the left reel 31 is "bell" is the small combination 05 of the combination numbers "104" to "107" in FIG. Therefore, in order to win the small part 05, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line (upper right).

Furthermore, at the middle third stop, as shown in part numbers “104” to “107” in FIG. 24, any one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B” and “blank” is effective line Stop at (middle to middle). In the middle reel 31, since “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, and “blank” are arranged at five symbol intervals, the “PB = 1” arrangement is added in total. Therefore, it is possible to always stop any of these four designs on the effective line. Furthermore, when "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B" or "blank" stops in the middle and middle stages, "bell" stops in the middle and lower stages.
Therefore, when the pressing order is correct at the middle left and right, the small winning combination 05 can be won with “PB = 1”.
In addition, when the small part 05 is made to win as described above, a so-called "bell" broken eye is displayed. Specifically, "BELL" stops at "lower left stage"-"middle lower stage"-"upper right stage".

Next, in the game where the small winning combination A1 table is used, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pressing order becomes incorrect at this time, it is controlled to win the small winning combination by number priority.
Here, in the small part 01, 04, 05, the kind and number of symbols of the middle reel 31 are
"White BAR": 5 pieces "Watermelon A": 5 pieces "Watermelon B": 5 pieces "Blank": 5 pieces "Bell": 6 pieces.
Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the middle first stop, "bell" is stopped at the effective line (middle middle). When the "BELL" is stopped on the activated line at the first stop of the middle, the combination that can be won is the small combination 04. Therefore, control is performed to make the small winning combination 04 even when the left and right stops thereafter.

Specifically, as shown in part numbers “98” to “103” in FIG. 24, since the symbol of the right reel 31 of the small part 04 is only “bell”, the effective line (upper right Stop the "bell" on the stage.
Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbols that can be stopped on the effective line (lower left row) are "Red 7", "White BAR", "Bell", "Replay A", "Cherry" or "Blank" is there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, control is performed so as not to stop "cherry" in the display window 11 when the weak cherry or the strong cherry is not elected. Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, either "red 7", "bell" or "replay A" (except for the eighth) can be stopped. Here, since the “bell” of the left reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement, it can be determined to stop only the “bell”.
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” can be stopped at “PB = 1”.

From the above, at the middle first stop (in any of middle left and right, middle right and left), the small winning combination 04 is won with “PB = 1”.
Here, when the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (lower left step) when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "bell"-"bell"-"bell" stops at the effective line. Alternatively, when "Red 7" is stopped at the effective line (lower left step) when the left reel 31 stops, a so-called "bell" broken mark is displayed in "left middle step"-"middle middle step"-"upper right step" .

Next, in the game where the small winning combination A1 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, since the pressing order becomes incorrect at this point, control is made to win the small winning combination by number priority.
Here, in the small part 01, 04, 05, the types of symbols on the right reel 31 and the number thereof are
"Red 7": 4 pieces "Black BAR": 4 pieces "White BAR": 4 pieces "Blank": 4 pieces "Bell": 10 pieces.
Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (upper right stage).

  Next, at the time of the second left stop, it is to make the effective line stop the "bell" at the time when the number of combinations of symbols increases most, so make the effective line (lower left stage) stop the "bell" . Then, at the middle third stop, control is made to stop any of the "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B" and "blank" on the effective line (middle middle) and make the small winning combination 05 win . As a result, it is possible to win the small winning combination 05 with “PB = 1”. Furthermore, so-called "bell" broken eyes are displayed in the same manner as in the middle of pushing order.

  On the other hand, for the second stop after the first right stop, the number of symbol combinations at that time is the largest number of combinations of symbols, because the effective line is to stop the "bell", so the effective line (middle middle) Stop the "bell". Then, at the time of the third stop on the left, “bell” or “red 7” is stopped on the effective line (lower left row) in the same manner as described above, and control is performed to make the small winning combination 04 win.

The small winning combination A2 table is used in the game when the condition device number "24" is won (small winning combination 01, 04, 06 double winning), and "right and left middle" (indicated as "132" in FIG. 29) When the stop switch is operated in the correct pressing order, the small part 01 which is the 9-piece winning combination is won by number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect answer order other than "right, left, middle", the number The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the small part combination 04 or 06, which is the one-piece combination, is awarded by priority.
In the game in which the small winning combination A2 table is used, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order, as in the small winning combination A1 table, priority can be given to the number of small winning combinations.

Moreover, after the left first stop, when it is the middle second stop, the pushing order incorrect answer is decided at this time. Then, since the symbol of the left reel 31 is "BELL" and the one-piece combination is the small combination 06, the small combination 06 is controlled to be won when the middle second stop and the right third stop.
Here, the “bell” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1”. Further, as described above, “red 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, and “blank” of the right reel 31 are “PB = 1” arrangement in total as described above. Therefore, the small role 06 can always be awarded.
Note that when "Red 7", "Black BAR", "White BAR" or "Blank" is stopped at the effective line (upper right) at the time of stopping the right reel 31, "Bell" stops at the middle right.
As a result, at the time of winning the small winning combination 06, the "bell" stops at the "lower left stage"-the "right middle stage"-the "lower right stage"("bell" broken eye).

On the other hand, in the game where the small winning combination A2 table is used, at the time of the first stop in the middle, since the pressing order becomes incorrect at this time, the small winning combination is controlled by number priority.
Here, in the small part 01, 04, 06, the kind and number of symbols of the middle reel 31 are
"White BAR": 4 pieces "Watermelon A": 4 pieces "Watermelon B": 4 pieces "Blank": 4 pieces "Bell": 10 pieces.

  Therefore, when priority is given to the number during middle first stop, "bell" is stopped at the effective line. Next, at the time of the second left stop, the largest number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped at the effective line at that time is to stop the “bell” at the effective line, so at the time of the second left stop, Stop the "bell" on the effective line. Then, at the time of the third right stop, the "red 7", the "black BAR", the "white BAR" or the "blank" are stopped to control the small winning combination 06 to win. The stop control of the small role 06 is the same as described above.

  On the other hand, after the first stop in the middle and at the second stop in the right, the largest number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line at that time is that the “bell” is stopped on the effective line. At the second stop, stop the "bell" on the effective line. Then, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the small combination 04 is made to win by stopping the “red 7”, the “white BAR”, the “bell”, the “replay A”, the “cherry” or the “blank”. Control. The stop control of the small role 04 is the same as described above.

Further, in the game where the small winning combination A2 table is used, since the pressing order becomes incorrect at this time at the time of the first right stop, control is made to win the small winning combination by number priority.
Here, in the small part 01, 04, 06, the types of symbols on the right reel 31 and the number thereof are
"Red 7": 5 pieces "Black BAR": 5 pieces "White BAR": 5 pieces "Blank": 5 pieces "Bell": 6 pieces.
Therefore, when priority is given to the number at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (upper right stage).
And at this time, only the small combination 04 can be stopped on the effective line, so the left and middle reels are set so that the combination of the symbols of the small combination 04 is stopped on the effective line at the left and middle stop. 31 Stop control. The stop control at the time of the small winning combination 04 is similar to the above.

The small winning combination A3 table is used in the game when the condition device number “25” is won (when the small winning combinations 02, 04, and 05 are double winning), and “middle left and right” (indicated as “213” in FIG. 29) When the stop switch is operated in the correct order of pressing, the small combination 02, which is a 9-piece combination, is won by number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other wrong solution pressing order, the number 1 is prioritized. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to win the small winning combination 04 or 05, which is a sheet combination.
In the game where the small winning combination A3 table is used, at the middle first stop, it is the pressing order correct at this time, so the “bell” which is a symbol related to the middle reel 31 of the small winning combination 02 is the effective line (middle middle) Stop it.

Next, at the time of the second stop on the left, the pressing order correctness is decided at this point. Therefore, in order to win the small role 02, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "red 7" or "watermelon A" is stopped on the effective line (lower left step). In the left reel 31, “red 7” and “watermelon A” are in the “PB = 1” arrangement in addition. In addition, when "red 7" or "watermelon A" is stopped in the lower left stage, "bell" stops in the middle left stage.
Furthermore, at the time of the third right stop, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (upper right part). When "Replay B" is stopped in the upper right row, "Bell" stops in the middle right row.
As a result, the small part 02 wins, and the "bell"-"bell"-"bell" stops at the middle line (invalid line).

  On the other hand, after the middle first stop, at the time of the second right stop, since the pressing order is incorrect at this point, switching to the number priority is made. Since the small reel 05 has the symbol of the middle reel 31 being "bell" and the symbol of the right reel 31 being "bell", the small reel 05 is controlled to win a prize. The second right stop and the third left stop for winning the small winning combination 05 are the same as those in the small winning combination 05 above.

Further, in the game where the small winning combination A3 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, since the pressing order is incorrect at this time, the stop control based on the number priority is performed.
The most common symbol of the left reel 31 in the small part 02, 04, 05 is the "bell". Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line. As a result, it is the small winning combination 04 (combination number "100") and the small combination 05 that can be won. And at the time of the second middle stop, the "bell" with the largest number of symbols is made effective. Also, at the time of the third right stop, "BELL" is stopped on the effective line, and the small winning combination 04 is won.

  Furthermore, after the first left stop, at the second right stop, the "bell" with the largest number of symbols is made effective. Next, at the middle third stop, stop the “bell” and make the small role 04 win, and stop any of the “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank”. Although it is possible to both win the small winning combination 05, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination 05 is controlled to be won. The stop control of the reel 31 in this case is the same as described above.

Similarly, in the game where the small winning combination A3 table is used, since the pressing order becomes incorrect at this time at the time of the first right stop, stop control based on the number priority is performed.
The most common symbol of the left reel 31 in the small part 02, 04, 05 is the "bell". Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line. As a result, the small winning combination 04 (combination number "100") and the small combination 05 can be awarded, as described above. And at the time of the second middle stop, the "bell" with the largest number of symbols is made effective. Also, at the time of the third right stop, "BELL" is stopped on the effective line, and the small winning combination 04 is won.

  The small winning combination A4 table is used in the game when the condition device number “26” is won (when the small winning combinations 02, 04 and 06 are double winning), and “middle right and left” (displayed as “231” in FIG. 29) When the stop switch is operated in the correct order of pressing, the small combination 02, which is a 9-piece combination, is won by number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other wrong solution pressing order, the number 1 is prioritized. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to win the small winning combination 04 or 06, which is a sheet combination.

In the game where the small winning combination A4 table is used, since the pressing order is correct at this time at the middle first stop, the “bell” which is the symbol of the middle reel 31 pertaining to the small winning combination 02 is an effective line (middle middle row) To stop. Furthermore, at the time of the second right stop, since the correct order of pushing is determined at this point, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped on the effective line.
Furthermore, at the time of the left third stop, “red 7” or “watermelon A” is stopped on the effective line (lower left row) (PB = 1).
As described above, when the pressing order is correct, the small winning combination 02 can be won with “PB = 1”.

  On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination A4 table is used, since the pressing order incorrect answer is decided at that point in time when the second left stop after the middle first stop, the number priority is switched to the number priority. For this reason, at the time of the second left stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (lower left stage). And at the time of the right third stop, “Bell” concerning small part 04 or “Red 7”, “Black BAR”, “White BAR” or “Blank” related to small part 06 can be stopped. , In the present embodiment, in order to win the small role 04, the "bell" is stopped.

In addition, in the game where the small winning combination A4 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, since the pressing order becomes incorrect at this point, "bell" is stopped on the activated line by number priority. In addition, at the time of the second second stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line. Further, at the time of the third right stop, any of the small winning combination 04 or 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, the small winning combination 04 is awarded.
On the other hand, after the left first stop, at the right second stop, any of "Rel 7", "Black BAR", "White BAR", or "Blank" related to the "Bell" related to the small part 04 or the small part 06 It is also possible to stop, but in the present embodiment, the "bell" is stopped in order to win the small role 04. Therefore, at the middle third stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, in the game in which the small winning combination A4 table is used, since the press order incorrect answer is determined at this time at the middle first stop, the middle reel 31 is stop-controlled by number priority. Since the symbol for which the number of symbol combinations of the middle reel 31 is the largest among the small members 02, 04, 06 is the "bell", the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
Next, after the middle first stop, when it is the left second stop, the "bell" is stopped by number priority. As a result, since the small winning combination 06 can be won, the symbol related to the small winning combination 06 is stopped at the time of the third right stop.
On the other hand, when it is the second right stop after the first middle stop, the "bell" is stopped by giving priority to the number. As a result, since the small winning combination 04 can be won, the symbol related to the small combination 04 is stopped in the same manner as described above at the time of the third right stop.

  The small winning combination A5 table is used in the game when the condition device number “27” is won (when the small winning combinations 03, 04 and 06 are double winning), and the “right and left middle” (indicated as “312” in FIG. 29) When the stop switch is operated in the correct order of pressing, the small combination 03 which is the 9-piece combination is won by number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in any other wrong answering order, the number 1 is prioritized. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to win the small winning combination 04 or 06, which is a sheet combination.

  In the game where the small winning combination A5 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, it is the pressing order correct at this time, so the “bell” which is the symbol of the right reel 31 pertaining to the small winning combination 03 is the effective line (upper right) Stop it. Further, at the second stop of the left, since the correct pressing order is determined at this point, “Replay B” or “Cherry” (“PB = 1” in total) is stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped. Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination A5 table is used, since the press order incorrectness is decided at that point in time after the first right stop (“bell”) and the second middle stop, the number priority is switched to number priority. For this reason, at the time of the second second stop, the "bell" is stopped. The small winning combination that can be won at this point is the small winning combination 04. Therefore, at the time of the left third stop, the predetermined symbol of the small part 04 is stopped on the effective line as described above.

Furthermore, in the game in which the small winning combination A5 table is used, at the time of the first left stop, the pushing order incorrect answer is determined at this time, so the left reel 31 is controlled to stop by number priority. Since the symbol for which the number of symbol combinations of the left reel 31 is the largest among the small members 03, 04, 06 is the "bell", the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
Next, after the left first stop ("bell"), when it is the middle second stop, "bell" is stopped by number priority. Further, at the time of the third right stop, any of the small winning combination 04 or 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, the small winning combination 04 is awarded.
On the other hand, after the left first stop ("bell"), when it is the right second stop, it is possible to win any of the small combination 04 or 06, but in the present embodiment, control is performed to make the small combination 06 win. Do. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the symbol of "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", or "blank" is stopped, and at the middle third stop, "bell" is stopped at the effective line. Let

Furthermore, in the game where the small winning combination A5 table is used, since the press order incorrect answer is decided at this time at the middle first stop, the stop control of the left reel 31 is given priority by number. Since the symbol for which the combination number of symbols on the middle reel 31 is the largest among the small members 03, 04, 06 is the "bell", the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
Next, after the middle first stop ("bell"), when it is the left second stop, "bell" is stopped by number priority. Further, at the time of the third right stop, any of the small winning combination 04 or 06 can be won, but in the present embodiment, the small winning combination 04 is awarded.
On the other hand, after the middle first stop ("bell"), when it is the right second stop, it is possible to win any of the small combination 04 or 06, but in the present embodiment, control is performed to make the small combination 06 win. Do. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the symbol of "red 7", "black BAR", "white BAR", or "blank" is stopped, and at the middle third stop, "bell" is stopped at the effective line. Let

The small winning combination A6 table is used in the game when the condition device number “28” is won (when the small winning combinations 03, 04, and 05 are double winning), and “right middle left” (FIG. 29 is displayed as “321”) When the stop switch is operated in the correct order of pressing), the small part 03 which is the 9-piece combination is won by number priority, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in other incorrect answering order, the number priority is given The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to win the small role 04 or 05 which is the one-sheet combination.
In the game where the small winning combination A6 table is used, since the pushing order is correct at this time at the first right stop, the “bell” is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped.
Furthermore, after the first right stop, at the second middle stop, the correct order of pushing is determined at this point, so "Cherry" is stopped on the effective line so that the small part 03 is made to win. Furthermore, at the time of the left third stop, “Replay B” or “Red 7” is stopped on the effective line. As a result, the small part 03 gets a prize.

  On the other hand, after the first right stop ("bell"), at the second stop on the left, since the pressing order incorrect answer is decided at this point, the switch is made to the number priority. As a result, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line. Furthermore, at the middle third stop, either “White BAR”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, or “Blank” is stopped on the active line in order to win the small part 05.

In the game in which the small winning combination A6 table is used, since the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at this time at the first left stop, the left reel 31 is controlled to stop by number priority. Since the symbol for which the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the effective line is the largest is the "bell", the "bell" is stopped on the effective line. Furthermore, at the time of the second middle stop, although the small combination 04 or the small combination 05 can be stopped on the activated line, in the present embodiment, the small combination 05 is controlled to win.
After the first left stop, at the second right stop, "bell" is stopped at the effective line by giving priority to the number. Furthermore, at the middle third stop time, it is possible to stop any of the small combination 04 or 05 on the effective line, but in the present embodiment, the small combination 05 is controlled to win a prize.

  In the game in which the small winning combination A6 table is used, since the pressing order incorrect answer is determined at this time at the middle first stop, the middle reel 31 is controlled to stop by the number priority. Since the symbol for which the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the effective line is the largest is the "bell", the "bell" is stopped on the effective line. When the “Bell” is stopped on the active line at the first stop during the middle, the small winning combination that can be won is the small winning combination 04, so when the left and right reels 31 are stopped, it relates to the small winning combination 04 as described above. Stop the predetermined symbol on the effective line.

The same table as the small combination A1 table to the small combination A6 table applies to the small combination B1 to small combination B6 tables described below. However, the small winning combination 07 included in the condition devices “29” to “34” is a small winning combination for controlling the conditional device, and winning in the game in which the small winning combination B1 to small combination B6 table is used There is no. In particular, the minor player 07 can win a prize when the condition device “50” is won as a strong chance.
The small winning combination B1 table is used when the condition device “29” is won, and when the right pressing order is “left middle right (123)), the small winning combination 01 is won by number of sheets priority, and other number of pressing orders is by number priority Win a small role 04 or 05.
The small winning combination B2 table is used when the condition device “30” is selected, and the small winning combination 01 is won by priority on the number of sheets when “right and left middle (132)” which is the correct pressing order. Win the role 04 or 06.

The small winning combination B3 table is used when the condition device “31” is won, and when the correct pressing order is “middle right and left (213)”, the small winning combination 02 is won by number priority, and the other pressing order is small by number priority Win the role 04 or 05.
The small winning combination B4 table is used when the condition device "32" is won, and when the correct pressing order is "middle right left (231)", the small winning combination 02 is won by number of sheets priority, and in the other pressing order, small numbers by number priority Win the role 04 or 06.
The small winning combination B5 table is used when the condition device “33” is won, and when the correct pressing order is “right / left middle (312)”, the small winning combination 03 is won by number priority, and the other pressing order is small by number priority Win the role 04 or 06.
The small winning combination B6 table is used when the condition device "34" is won, and when the right pressing order is "middle right left (321)", the small winning combination 03 is won by number of sheets priority, and in other pressing orders by number priority Win a small role 04 or 05.

Furthermore, the small winning combination C1 to small winning combination C6 tables described below are the same as the low winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6 tables, respectively. However, the small winning combination 08 included in the condition devices “35” to “40” is a small winning combination for controlling the conditional device, and winning in the game in which the small winning combination C1 table to the small winning combination C6 table is used There is no. The small role player 08 can win a prize when the condition device “50” is won as a strong chance.
The small winning combination C1 table is used when the condition device “35” is won, and when the right pressing order is “left middle right (123)), the small winning combination 01 is won by number of sheets priority, and in other pressing orders by number priority Win a small role 04 or 05.
The small winning combination C2 table is used when the condition device “36” is won, and when the correct pressing order is “right and left middle (132)”, the small winning combination 01 is won by priority on the number of sheets. Win the role 04 or 06.

The small winning combination C3 table is used when the condition device “37” is won, and when the correct pressing order is “middle right and left (213)”, the small winning combination 02 is won by number priority, and the other pressing order is small by number priority Win the role 04 or 05.
The small winning combination C4 table is used when the condition device "38" is won, and when the correct pressing order is "middle right left (231)", the small winning combination 02 is won by number of sheets priority, and in the other pressing order, small numbers by number priority Win the role 04 or 06.
The small winning combination C5 table is used when the condition device “39” is won, and when the correct pressing order is “right / left middle (312)”, the small winning combination 03 is won by number of sheets priority, Win the role 04 or 06.
The small winning combination C6 table is used when the condition device “40” is won, and when the correct pressing order is “right middle left (321)”, the small winning combination 03 is won by number of sheets priority, and in other pressing orders by number priority Win a small role 04 or 05.

  In the above-mentioned small combination B1 to small combination C6 tables, stop control of small combination 01 to 03 at the time of number priority, and stop control of small combination 04 to 06 at the number priority, small combination A1 table to small combination A6 table Is the same as

The small winning combination D table is used in the game when the condition device “41” is won (small winning combination 01, 02, 03 double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small winning combination 01, 02 or 03 The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to win one of them.
In the small role D table, any of the small roles 01 to 03 is awarded in any pressing order. Here, for example, in a game where a small winning combination D table is used, the small winning combination 01 is won at the left first stop, the small winning combination 02 at the middle first stopping, and the small winning combination 03 at the right first stopping. Things are also possible. In the present embodiment, when the condition device “41” is selected, it is positioned as a bell for executing a lottery of AT, and the “bell” match is visible in the middle line (ineffective line). To control.

In the small winning combination E1 table to the small winning combination E3 table, 3 small winning combinations are won with “PB = 1” when the pressing order is correct, and 3 small winning combinations with “PB ≠ 1” when the pressing order is incorrect Or, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop and display the specific symbol.
The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the conditional device “42” is won (when the small winning combinations 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 17 are double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the conditional device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the small winning combinations included in the above can be won, and a special symbol is displayed when the small winning combination is missed.

  Here, all of the condition devices “42” to “44” have a dual winning combination of all three small winnings. Therefore, in the condition devices “42” to “44”, the number of winning combinations of small winning combinations that are double winning is the same. Accordingly, in the small winning combination E1 to small winning combination E3 tables, the reel 31 can be stop-controlled without performing stop control of number priority / number priority. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the “bell” is to be stopped on the effective line at the first stop.

In the game where the small winning combination E1 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, "bell" is stopped on the effective line (lower left stage). As a result, at the time of the first left stop, the small winning combination that can be won is the small winning combination 09-12.
In addition, after the left first stop, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, any one of “white BAR”, “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “blank” is stopped. In the middle reel 31, since these four symbols are “PB = 1” arrangement in total, any of these symbols can be always stopped at the effective line.
Further, after the first left stop, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, at the time of the first left stop, any of the small winning combinations 09 to 12 wins with “PB = 1”, and the specific symbol is not stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, at the middle first stop, the "bell" is stopped on the activated line (middle middle). As a result, the small winning combination that can be won at the middle first stop becomes the small winning combination 13.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first stop in the middle, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” related to the small part 13 is stopped at the effective line. Since “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” in the left reel 31 have the “PB = 1” arrangement in addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols on the effective line.

  In addition, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, “red 7” related to the small winning combination 13 is stopped at the effective line. Since “red 7” of the right reel 31 is only one, it is “PB」 1 ”. Furthermore, in the case of one arrangement among the symbol number "20", it is possible to stop on the effective line within the range of up to 4 komasari (5 symbols in total) in addition to the symbol. Therefore, the probability that “red 7” can be stopped on the effective line when the right stop switch 42 is operated at random is “1⁄4”.

On the other hand, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, when “red 7” can not be stopped at the effective line, “replay A” is stopped at the effective line. Thereby, when "red 7" of the right reel 31 is dropped, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "watermelon A / watermelon B"-"bell"-"replay A", and the specific symbol 02 is stopped.
Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop, the small winning combination 13 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 02 (probability "3/4") stops.

Further, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line (upper right corner). As a result, at the time of the first right stop, the small winning combination that can be won is the small winning combination 17.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, the "black BAR", "watermelon A", or "watermelon B" related to the small part 17 is stopped at the effective line. Since “black BAR”, “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” in the left reel 31 are “PB = 1” arrangement in total (“watermelon A” and “watermelon B” only “PB = 1” arrangement and ) Can always stop any of these symbols on the active line.

In addition, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, the "white BAR" related to the small part 17 is stopped at the effective line. Since there is only one “white BAR” of the middle reel 31, “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, similarly to the above, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at random, the probability that the "white BAR" can be stopped on the effective line is "1/4".
On the other hand, when the middle reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, when the "white BAR" can not be stopped at the effective line, "cherry" is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1). Thereby, when "White BAR" of middle reel 31 is missed, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "Black BAR / watermelon A / watermelon B"-"cherry"-"bell", and the specific symbol 03 is stopped. .
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small winning combination 17 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 03 (probability "3/4") is stopped.

The small winning combination E2 table is used in the game when the conditional device "43" is won (when the small winning combinations 09, 10, 11, 12, 14, 18 are double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the conditional device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the small winning combinations included in the above can be won, and a special symbol is displayed when the small winning combination is missed.
In the reel stop control at the time of the first left stop, the small winning combination 09 to 12 is won with “PB = 1”, similarly to the small winning combination E1 table.
During the first stop during the middle, "BELL" is stopped on the active line.
In addition, when the left reel 31 stops after the first stop in the middle, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped at the effective line. In the left reel 31, since "watermelon A" and "watermelon B" are in the "PB = 1" arrangement in addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols on the effective line.
Therefore, at the time of the first left stop, it is possible to win the small winning combination 09-12 with "PB = 1".

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, the "black BAR" is stopped at the effective line. In the left reel 31, the “black BAR” related to the small role 14 is stopped at the effective line. Since “black BAR” of the right reel 31 is only one, it is “PB ≠ 1”. Therefore, similarly to the above, the probability that the “black BAR” can be stopped on the effective line when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at random is “1⁄4”.
On the other hand, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the middle first stop, when the "black BAR" can not be stopped at the effective line, the "replay A" is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1). Thereby, when the "black BAR" of the right reel 31 is dropped, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "watermelon A / watermelon B"-"bell"-"replay A", and the specific symbol 02 is stopped.
Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop, the small winning combination 14 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 02 (probability "3/4") stops.

Also, in the game where the small winning combination E2 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, "black BAR", "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped at the effective line. In the left reel 31, since "watermelon A" and "watermelon B" are in the "PB = 1" arrangement in addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols on the effective line.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, "watermelon A" is stopped at the effective line. Since "watermelon A" of the middle reel 31 is only one, it is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, similarly to the above, the probability that “watermelon A” can be stopped on the effective line when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at random is “1⁄4” (winning ratio of the small winning combination 18) .
On the other hand, when it is not possible to stop "watermelon A" on the effective line when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, "cherry" is stopped on the effective line (PB = 1). Thereby, when "watermelon A" of middle reel 31 is dropped, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black BAR / watermelon A / watermelon B"-"cherry"-"bell", and the specific symbol 03 stops .
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small winning combination 18 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 03 (probability "3/4") is stopped.

The small winning combination E3 table is used in the game when the conditional device “44” is won (when the small winning combinations 09, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19 are double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the small winning combinations included in the above can be won, and a special symbol is displayed when the small winning combination is missed.
First, when the first stop is in progress, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
In addition, when the left reel 31 stops after the first stop during the middle, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the middle first stop, "red 7", "black BAR", "blank", or "white BAR" is stopped at the effective line. In the right reel 31, these four symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols, and “PB = 1” in total. Therefore, one of the symbols can always be stopped on the effective line.
Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination E3 table is used, at the middle first stop, any of the small winning combinations 13 to 16 wins with “PB = 1”.

In addition, in the game in which the small winning combination E3 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “white BAR” can be stopped at the effective line (probability “1/4”), and “white BAR” can not be stopped at the effective line Stop the bell on the effective line ("3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the left first stop, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the left first stop, the small winning combination 09 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 01 (probability "3/4") is stopped.

Furthermore, in the game where the small winning combination E3 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
Then, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
In addition, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, "watermelon B" is stopped at the effective line, and is stopped at the effective line (probability "1/4"), and "white BAR" is stopped at the effective line. If you can not do this, stop "Cherry" on the active line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small winning combination 19 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 03 (probability "3/4") is stopped.

The small winning combination E4 table is used in the game when the conditional device “45” is won (when the small winning combinations 10, 13, 14, 15, 16 and 20 are double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the conditional device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the small winning combinations included in the above can be won, and a special symbol is displayed when the small winning combination is missed.
First, when the first stop is in progress, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
In addition, when the left reel 31 stops after the first stop during the middle, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 stops after the first stop in the middle, "red 7", "black BAR", "blank", or "white BAR" is stopped at the effective line ("PB = 1" in total). .
Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination E4 table is used, at the middle first stop, any of the small winning combinations 13 to 16 wins with “PB = 1”.

In addition, in the game in which the small winning combination E4 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, the “bell” is stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “watermelon A” is stopped at the effective line (probability “1/4”), and “watermelon A” can not be stopped at the effective line "Bell" is stopped on the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the left first stop, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the left first stop, the small winning combination 10 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 01 (probability "3/4") stops.

Furthermore, in the game where the small winning combination E4 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
Then, when the left reel 31 is stopped after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
In addition, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, it is possible to stop “blank” at the valid line and stop it at the valid line (probability “1⁄4”) and stop “blank” at the valid line. When it can not be made, "cherry" is stopped on the effective line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first right stop, the small winning combination 20 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 03 (probability "3/4") stops.

The small winning combination E5 table is used in the game when the conditional device “46” is won (when the small winning combinations 11, 15, 17, 18, 19 and 20 are double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the conditional device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the small winning combinations included in the above can be won, and a special symbol is displayed when the small winning combination is missed.
First, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
In addition, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, the "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", or "blank" is stopped at the effective line ("PB = 1" in total). .
Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination E5 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, any of the small winning combinations 17 to 20 wins with “PB = 1”.

In addition, in the game in which the small winning combination E5 table is used, at the time of the first stop on the left, “bell” is stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first left stop, “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (probability “1⁄4”), and “watermelon B” can not be stopped at the effective line. "Bell" is stopped on the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the left first stop, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the left first stop, the small winning combination 11 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 01 (probability "3/4") stops.

Furthermore, in the game in which the small winning combination E5 table is used, at the time of the first stop during the middle, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first stop during the middle, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
In addition, when the right reel 31 stops after the first stop in the middle, stop "blank" at the valid line and stop it at the valid line (probability "1/4") and stop "blank" at the valid line If it can not be made, "Replay A" is stopped on the active line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop, the small winning combination 15 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 02 (probability "3/4") stops.

The small winning combination E6 table is used in the game when the conditional device "47" is won (when the small winning combinations 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 are double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the conditional device The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that one of the small winning combinations included in the above can be won, and a special symbol is displayed when the small winning combination is missed.
First, at the time of the first right stop, the "bell" is stopped at the effective line.
In addition, when the left reel 31 stops after the first right stop, “black BAR”, “watermelon A”, or “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first right stop, the "white BAR", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", or "blank" is stopped at the effective line ("PB = 1" in total). .
Therefore, in the game in which the small winning combination E6 table is used, at the time of the first right stop, any of the small winning combinations 17 to 20 wins with “PB = 1”.

Also, in the game where the small winning combination E6 table is used, at the time of the first left stop, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
In addition, when the middle reel 31 stops after the first left stop, "Blank" is stopped at the valid line (probability "1/4"), and when "Blank" can not be stopped at the valid line, "Bell" Stop on the active line (probability "3/4").
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped after the left first stop, “Replay B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
Therefore, at the time of the left first stop, the small winning combination 12 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 01 (probability "3/4") is stopped.

Furthermore, in the game in which the small winning combination E6 table is used, at the time of the first stop during the middle, the "bell" is stopped on the effective line.
Then, when the left reel 31 stops after the first stop during the middle, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped at the effective line (PB = 1).
In addition, when the right reel 31 stops after the first stop in the middle, the "white BAR" is stopped at the effective line to stop the effective line (probability "1/4"), and the "white BAR" is stopped at the effective line If it can not do, "Replay A" is stopped on the active line (probability "3/4").
Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop, the small winning combination 16 (probability "1/4") or the specific symbol 02 (probability "3/4") stops.

The small winning combination F table is used when the condition device “48” is won (small winning combination 07, 08, 21 and 22 double winning), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the small winning combination 21 is stopped to the effective line The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to make it possible. The small role F is to cause the stop appearance of "weak watermelon" to appear.
Specifically, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Black BAR (No. 18)", "Replay A (limited to No. 13 except for Nos. 3 and 8)," Replay B "on the effective line (lower left row) Either (except for No. 15 and limited to No. 0) or "Cherry (No. 5 or 10)" is stopped (PB = 1). Thereby, "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" stops in the left middle row.
In addition, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (middle middle) (PB ≠ 1). If it is not possible to stop "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" in the middle and middle stages, "replay A" is stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the effective line (upper right part). When "Replay A" is stopped at the upper right, "Watermelon A" stops at the middle right.
Therefore, in the game where the small winning combination F table is used, when it is possible to stop "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" in the middle, the small winning combination 21 wins, and in the middle row (invalid line), "Watermelon A / watermelon B"-"watermelon A / watermelon B"-"watermelon A" stops (stopping of weak watermelon).
On the other hand, when "Replay A" is stopped in the middle and middle stages, the small part 07 or 08 is stopped on the effective line, and it becomes the same stopping appearance as the strong chance described later.

The small combination G table is used when the condition device “49” is selected (small combinations 07, 08, 21, 22, and 23 are doubled), and the small combination 22 is effective within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the reels 31. The small role F is to cause the stop appearance of "strong watermelon" to appear.
Specifically, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (lower left row) (PB = 1).
In addition, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (middle middle) (PB ≠ 1). If it is not possible to stop "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" in the middle and middle stages, "replay A" is stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” is stopped on the effective line (upper right). (PB = 1).
Therefore, when it is possible to stop "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" in the middle and middle in the game where the small role G table is used, the small portion 22 wins, and "watermelon A /" Watermelon B "-" watermelon A / watermelon B "-" watermelon A "stops (stopping of strong watermelon).
On the other hand, when "Replay A" is stopped in the middle and middle stages, the small part 07 or 08 is stopped on the effective line, and it becomes the same stopping appearance as the strong chance described later.

The small winning combination H table is used when the condition device “50” is won (small winning combination 07, 08 double winning), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small winning combination 07 or 08 to the effective line In addition, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined. As described above, the small role 07 or 08 is positioned as a strong chance (stopping time at which the AT lottery is performed) in the present embodiment.
When the small winning combination H table is used, “watermelon A” or “watermelon B” is stopped on the effective line (lower left) when the left reel 31 is stopped (PB = 1), and the effective line is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. "Replay A" is stopped at (middle middle) (PB = 1). Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay A” is stopped on the effective line (upper right part) (PB = 1).
As a result, the small player 07 or 08 wins with “PB = 1”.

The small role I table is used during RB game during 1BB game. In the RB game in the 1BB game, a small winning combination I is won with a winning probability "1". The small role I is a double winning of the small portions 01 to 24 (all small portions). Then, when the small winning combination I is used, regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42, the reels 31 are stop-controlled with priority on the number of sheets. Thereby, any of the small part 01 to 03 always wins.
As mentioned above, at the time of small part 01 winning, "Bell" is aligned in the lower line, at the time of small winning 02, "Bell" is aligned in the middle line, and in small winning 03, "Bell" is aligned at the upper line. . Therefore, in order to avoid the monotony of the stop point, for example, based on the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small part 01 is made to win at the first left stop, and the small part 02 is made at the middle first stop. At the time of the stop, it may be possible to win the small part 03.

The 1BB table is used when playing a game when the item condition device “1” is won (1BB alone), or when 1BB is won before the game and when it is not won in the game, the stop control of the reel 31 In the range, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB on the effective line, and not stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BB on the effective line, the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31 was determined It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BB is "black BAR" in all reels 31 (PB) 1), "black BAR" can not be stopped on the effective line unless the eye is pushed.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, the following stop control may be mentioned when the small winning combination or the replay is won while the special role 1BB is held.
For example, in the first place, priority is given to stopping the symbols of both of the winning special role and the small role or the replay on the effective line, and when it is not possible to stop both of the symbols on the effective line, the player wins. The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a small part or a replay on an effective line is mentioned. In addition, the stop control to stop the symbols of both the special role and the small portion or the replay on the effective line is up to the second stop, and at the third stop, the special portion or the small portion or the replay is controlled to win. , There will be no multiple winning combination of winning combination.
Also, secondly, priority is given to stopping the symbols of both of the winning special part and the small part or the replay on the effective line, and when both of the symbols can not be stopped on the effective line, the player is elected. There is stop control that gives priority to stopping the special role (1BB) symbol on the effective line (as opposed to the above).

Furthermore, thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, when stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, additionally, When it is possible to simultaneously stop the symbol of the winning special role (1BB) on the activated line, stop control to stop at that position is mentioned.
In addition, when the special combination and the small combination or replay of “PB = 1” are dually won (when simultaneously elected), both the symbol of the special combination won and the small combination or the symbol of the replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop the effective line, and it is also possible to control to stop only the symbol of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay on the effective line.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The prize determination means 63h determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the reel 31 stopped at the effective line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won Or not). The prize determination means 63h determines the symbol on the effective line by detecting, for example, the angle at the time of stopping the motor 32, the number of steps, and the like.

  In the payout means 63i, it is determined by the prize determination means 63h that the combination of the symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any one of the combinations, A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed such that the number of medals inserted in the game is automatically inserted without paying out the medals.

The RT control means 63j determines whether or not the transition condition of RT is satisfied when stopping all reels 31 in every game, and when it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, controls to perform the transition of RT. It is a thing.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of this embodiment includes six types of non-RT and RT1 to RT5. Then, as shown in FIG. 32, the type of condition device to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

As shown in FIG. 37, the RT according to this embodiment includes the non-RT (RT0) and RT1 to RT5 as described above. In the following description, non-RT is also included in one of RTs.
In the present embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set at the time of the stop display of the combination of symbols or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, the complete stop (when all the reels 31 stop). Therefore, in FIG. 37, for example, when the replay 05 wins when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all the reels 31 stop. The transition to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB.

The non-internal medium game corresponds to non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
In addition, inside during the game, corresponds to RT4.
Furthermore, during the 1BB game, it corresponds to RT5.
During execution of the AT to be described later, control is made to stay at RT3 as control of the slot machine 10 side, but when a player's push switch miss order or the like occurs, stay at RT1 or RT2 In some cases.

In addition, even during non-AT, there may be a transition to RT2 or RT3.
First, non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 are all non-internal inside games, and in these non-internal inside games, a lottery of an article condition device number "1" (1 BB) is performed. When the player wins 1BB in these RTs, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, it is also possible to shift to RT at the moment of winning 1BB and to define the game winning 1BB as an internal middle game. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the transition condition of RT is all suspension time, it is a non-internal game during the period from the moment when the 1BB is won (instant) to all suspension of the game. It shifts to the internal middle game when all the stops in the won game (when 1BB has not won). In addition, when 1BB wins in the game won by 1BB, it shifts to RT5 when the game is completely stopped, and in this case, it does not go through RT4 (internal play).

RT 4 is continued until the winning 1 BB wins. When the RT control means 63j determines that 1BB has won in RT4, it determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT5.
RT5 is a 1BB game, and when it shifts to RT5, it is continued until the termination condition of RT5 (the termination condition of 1BB gaming) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1BB game is set to the payout of more than 450 medals. At RT5, the condition device number "51" is selected every game, and there are nine payouts for each game. Therefore, the payout number of 450 will be exceeded at the 51st game of RT5.
The RT control means 63j determines whether or not each game has paid out more than 450 medals in RT5, and when it is determined that more than 450 medals have been paid out, satisfies the transition condition of RT (1BB gaming End condition) and control to shift to the non-RT from the next game.

  In non-RT, the RT control means 63j continues non-RT until a specific symbol is displayed. In the non-RT, each condition device of the small winning combination E1 to E6 is drawn, and if one of these condition devices is won and a small winning combination is dropped in the game, a specific symbol is displayed. When the specific symbol is displayed, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT1.

  RT1 continues until Replay 05 is stopped and displayed. In RT1, each condition device of replays B1 to B5 is drawn, and any of these condition devices is won, and if stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order in which replay 05 wins, replay 05 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 05 is stopped and displayed in RT1, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT2.

The RT 2 continues until the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed, or the specific symbol is displayed. At RT2, each condition device of the replays C1 to C5 is drawn, and any of these condition devices is won, and the replay 06 is stopped and displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order that the replay 06 wins. When the replay 06 is stopped and displayed in RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT3.
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which the condition device of any one of the replays C1 to C5 is won and the replay 03 or 04 wins in RT2, the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed. When the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT1.

  Furthermore, at RT2, each condition device of the small winning combination E1 to E6 is drawn, and if one of these condition devices is won and the small winning combination is dropped, a specific symbol is displayed. When a specific symbol is displayed in RT2, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT1.

  The RT3 is continued until the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed, or until a specific symbol is displayed. At RT3, each condition device of replays D1 to D3 is drawn, and any of these condition devices is won, and replay 03 or 04 is stopped when stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order that replay 03 or 04 wins. indicate. When the replay 03 or 04 is stopped and displayed in RT3, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT1.

  On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order in which any one of the condition devices of the replays D1 to D3 is won and the replay 01 or 02 wins in RT3, the replay 01 or 02 is stopped and displayed. The RT control means 63j maintains RT3 when the replay 01 or 02 is stopped and displayed in RT3.

  Furthermore, in RT3, each condition device of the small winning combination E1 to E6 is drawn, and if one of these condition devices is won and the small winning combination is dropped, a specific symbol is displayed. When a specific symbol is displayed in RT3, the RT control means 63j determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT1.

Furthermore, in the above RT transition, the staying probability of RT1 is the highest during non-internal and non-AT. However, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order (1/6) at the time of winning of the condition device in which the replay is won in duplicate, it may shift to RT2 or RT3. However, in RT2 and RT3, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong push order (5/6) at the time of winning of the condition device in which the replay is won in duplicate, the process returns to RT1. Moreover, even if the specific symbol is displayed when the small winning combination E1 to E6 is won, the process returns to RT1. Thus, during non-AT, it is set to return to RT1 as much as possible.
The relationship between the RT and the main gaming state (non-AT / AT) will be described later.

The main gaming state control means 63k determines whether or not the transition condition of the main gaming state is satisfied for each game, and controls the transition of the main gaming state when determining that the transition condition of the main gaming state is satisfied is there. Although the main gaming state and the RT have relevance, they shift independently of each other.
FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the main gaming state.
Here, the "main gaming state" is, in the present embodiment,
Main gaming state 0: Normal Main gaming state 1: AT precursor Main gaming state 2: AT preparation Main gaming state 3: AT
Main gaming state 4: 1 BB inside Main gaming state 5: 1 BB playing Main gaming state 6: AT preparation or AT, and inside of 1BB Main gaming state 7: Eight kinds of AT preparation or AT, and during 1 BB gaming Prepare.

Among the above eight types of main gaming states, the non-inside is the main gaming states 0 to 3.
In addition, inside are the main gaming states 4 and 6.
Furthermore, during 1BB gaming, it is main gaming state 5 and 7.
In main game states 6 and 7, "AT preparation or AT and is displayed", but AT preparation or AT and 1BB internal or 1BB game do not progress simultaneously but AT This corresponds to the case in which 1BB is won during preparation or AT. In this case, the AT preparation or AT is suspended to make the inside of 1BB or 1BB in game.
The main gaming state 0 (normal time) is a game in which the AT has not been won (AT stock number = “0”) and a game in which 1BB has not been won.
When the AT is won in the main gaming state 0, the main gaming state control means 63k randomly determines the number of AT precursor games. The number of prognostic games is determined using random numbers within the range of “0” to “32”. It should be noted that the number of prognostic games may not be determined by the main gaming state control means 63k, but may be determined when the aforementioned AT lottery means 63d is won by the AT lottery.

  When the AT is won in the main game state 0 (normal time), the next game is transferred to the main game state 1 (AT precursor). Then, the player stays in the main gaming state 1 for the number of games (predicted number of games) determined at AT winning. For this reason, the main gaming state control means 63k counts the number of games every game when shifting to the AT sign. Then, when the “precursor game number =“ 0 ””, the next game is transferred to the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation).

On the other hand, when the main gaming state control means 63k wins 1BB without winning the AT in the main gaming state 0, it controls to shift to the main gaming state 4 (during 1BB inside) from the next game. In the present embodiment, in the main gaming state 4, the AT lottery is not performed.
Here, as described above, the inside of 1BB is RT4. Therefore, "main gaming state 4 = RT4". In the inside of the 1BB, the correct pressing order is not notified when the pressing order bell is won.

In addition, when 1 BB and strong cherry are won in duplicate, an AT lottery may be performed based on the winning of strong cherry and may be elected AT. In this case, the inside of 1BB (main gaming state 4) is established based on the winning of 1BB. And, after this winning, even if winning a strong cherry in the inside of 1BB, AT lottery is not done. As a result, the player intentionally stretches the inside of the 1BB to prevent capture that attempts to receive an AT lottery.
Even if the strong cherry is won in the inside of 1BB, the stop control of the reel 31 in the inside of 1BB is made different, and it becomes the stop point when weak cherry is won (even when the left reel 31 stops) In the middle stage, the "cherry" is not stopped but the lower stage is controlled to "cherry"). As a result, it is possible to show the player as if the weak cherry has been won without having won the strong cherry. Normally, since the AT lottery is performed when the strong cherry is won, the strong cherry win benefits the player, but if the AT lottery is not performed in the 1BB inside, the strong cherry will be won (winning) in the 1BB inside , To give the player the impression of a loss.
Furthermore, when the strong cherry is won during 1BB, not only the stop control of the reel 31 but also effects different from those when the strong cherry is won during 1BB non-inside (effects such as back lamp effects and sound effects) are output It is preferable to show the player that the weak cherries are won (strong cherries are not won) also for the effect by changing to the effect when the weak cherries are won, for example.

Main gaming state 4 is continued until 1BB is won. The main gaming state control means 63k controls to shift to the main gaming state 5 (1BB gaming) when 1BB is won in the main gaming state 4. As in the above-described RT transition, when the main gaming state control means 63k wins 1BB in the main gaming state 0 and wins 1BB in the game, it determines that the main gaming state transition condition is satisfied Control is made to shift to the main gaming state 5 (without passing through the main gaming state 4) from the next game.
. The main gaming state 5 corresponds to 1BB gaming, and corresponds to the above-mentioned RT5. Therefore, "main gaming state 5 = RT5".

  Since the main gaming state 5 is a 1BB game, as described above, the game is continued until there are more than 450 payouts. When there is a payout exceeding 450 in main gaming state 5, main gaming state control means 63k determines that the transition condition of main gaming state (the ending condition of main gaming state 5) is satisfied, and from the next game on, main Control to shift to the game state 0 or 2.

In the present embodiment, in the main gaming state 5, the AT lottery is executed, and when the AT lottery in the main gaming state 5 is won, the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation) is entered when the main gaming state 5 is ended. To control.
On the other hand, when the main lottery 5 in the main gaming state 5 is not won, the main gaming state 0 is entered when the main gaming state 5 is ended.

The main gaming state 2 continues until the AT start condition is established or until 1 BB is won. In the present embodiment, when the main gaming state control means 63k satisfies the AT start condition in the main gaming state 2, the transition from the next game to the main gaming state 3 (AT) is made. On the other hand, main gaming state control means 63k, in main gaming state 2, wins 1BB before satisfying the AT start condition, and when 1BB does not win in the game, it shifts from the next game to main gaming state 6 Control to do so. Then, the main gaming state 6 is continued until 1 BB is won. When 1 BB is won in the main gaming state 6, the main gaming state control means 63k controls to shift to the main gaming state 7 from the next game.
When the player is elected 1BB in main gaming state 2 and is elected 1BB in the relevant game, main gaming state control means 63k enters main gaming state 7 (without passing through main gaming state 6) from the next game. Control to migrate.

The main gaming state 7 continues until RT5, that is, 1BB gaming ends. When the main gaming state control means 63k determines that the ending condition of the main gaming state 7 (1BB gaming) is satisfied in the main gaming state 7, it controls to shift to the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation) from the next game Do. As described above, the main gaming states 6 and 7 are states in which the 1BB game is consumed while having the right to execute the AT after the 1BB game is over.
In the main gaming states 0 to 7 described above, in the present embodiment, strictly, the main gaming state 3 is only referred to as the AT. When the player wins 1 BB during AT and shifts to the main gaming state 6, although AT is in progress, the AT is temporarily suspended to be in 1 BB. Furthermore, when the 1BB is won, 1BB is in play.

It is the main gaming state 3 in principle that the correct push order is notified when the push order bell is won. In the main gaming state 2, it is optional whether or not to notify the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. Here, when the correct gaming order is notified when the main gaming state 2 is pressed in the main gaming state 2, it is necessary to prevent the capture of staying in the main gaming state 2 without intentionally shifting to the main gaming state 3. On the other hand, it is considered that there is no concern that the main gaming state 3 is not intentionally shifted to when the main gaming state 2 is not notified of the pressing order when the correct bell is selected in the main gaming state 2.
Further, in the main gaming state 2, since it is necessary to shift to the main gaming state 3, an RT promotion push sequence (a push sequence to shift to RT3) is notified at the time of replay duplicate winning.
When the main gaming state 5 or 7 (1 BB gaming) is ended and the state is shifted to the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation), RT is non-RT. And in non-RT, it does not shift to RT1 unless a specific symbol is displayed. For this reason, even during AT preparation, during non-RT, at the time of winning the condition device numbers "42" to "47", the push order for winning 3 bells is not notified (as many specific symbols as possible can be displayed) To increase sex).

Further, in the main gaming state 4 corresponding to the inside of the 1BB, the pressing order is not notified when the pressing order is won. This is to prevent the capture of intentionally staying in the interior of 1BB without winning the winning 1BB.
On the other hand, when the player is elected to 1BB in the main gaming state 2 or 3 and shifts to the main gaming state 6 (during the inside of 1BB), the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer may be continued at the winning order. For example, if the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is suddenly interrupted during AT, the player is immediately notified that the player has won the 1BB. On the other hand, if the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer at the time of winning the bell is won in the inside of the 1BB, it will be possible to stay in the inside of the 1BB without winning the winning 1BB. As a countermeasure against this, in the inside of 1BB, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order when the push order bell is won, setting is made so that the payout rate becomes less than “1”. Alternatively, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the notification of the pressing order when the bell is won may be interrupted after a predetermined number of games (e.g., five games) have been moved after the 1BB is won.
Furthermore, in the main gaming states 5 and 7 corresponding to the 1BB game, since the lottery such as the pushing order bell is not performed from the beginning, the correct pushing order is not notified.

As described above, when the AT start condition is satisfied in the main gaming state 2, the next gaming state is shifted to the main gaming state 3 (AT).
Here, RT in the main gaming state 2 is either non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3. Since the main gaming state 7 is a 1BB gaming, when ending the 1BB gaming and shifting from the next game to the main gaming state 2, the gaming is non-RT.
Even if the main gaming state 2 is any RT, control is made to execute the main gaming state 3 (AT) at RT3 as much as possible.
For example, when the main gaming state 2 is non-RT, it waits until a specific symbol is displayed, or in a game in which the specific symbol can be displayed, it notifies the pressing order that the specific symbol can be displayed. This causes the transition from non-RT to RT1.

Further, in RT1, the process waits until the replays B1 to B5 are won, and when the replays B1 to B5 are won, a push order to make the replay 05 win (shift to RT2) is notified. Furthermore, in RT2, it waits until it becomes replay C1-C5 winning, When it wins in replay C1-C5, it announces pushing order which makes Replay 06 a prize (it shifts to RT3). Then, when it shifts to RT3, AT, ie, main gaming state 3 is started.
The reason for this control is that the AT is executed with the replay high probability (RT). In the present embodiment, RT3 is a high replay probability for non-RT, RT1 and RT2.

However, even if the player does not follow the notification when the player has made a mistake in pushing the stop switch 42 or informed the pushing order of the stop switch 42 to shift to RT3, There is a possibility that it does not shift to RT3 when
If the transition to RT3 is set to the main gaming state 3, ie, the AT start condition, the main gaming state 2 (during AT preparation) is pressed to announce the correct pressing order when the bell is won, the pushing order bell is selected in RT2. At the time of winning, the stop switch 42 is operated in the notified correct pressing order, but when the replay repeated winning is made, the RT1 and RT2 are moved back and forth between RT1 and RT2 if the informed correct pressing order is not intentionally followed Do not migrate. As a result, it is possible to intentionally do not shift to RT3 indefinitely.
As a countermeasure in such a case, the following control may be performed.

  First, at the time of replay C winning in RT2, even if it is not in accordance with the notified correct pressing order, it is possible to shift to the main gaming state 3 and start the AT. In this case, if the user does not operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order at the time of replay C winning in RT2, it falls to RT1. Therefore, the player starts the AT from the RT1, and the AT during the transition to the RT3 has a normal probability of the replay winning probability. In this case, when the player wins the replay B in RT1, the correct pressing order for shifting to RT2 is informed, and when the replay C is won in RT2, the pressing order for accurate shifting for RT3 is notified .

In the related art, when a pushing order different from the informed correct pushing order is made, control is performed not to notify the correct pushing order when a pushing order bell is elected for a certain period as a penalty. However, even if the player operates the stop switch 42 in any pushing order, it can not be controlled in this way if the specification is made not to give a penalty.
Therefore, in RT 2, in the game informing the correct pressing order to shift to RT 3, the main gaming state is uniformly regardless of which RT to stay even if the stop switch 42 is not operated in the correct pressing order. Is transferred to the main gaming state 3 and AT starts. In addition, even when AT is started from RT1, when the push order bell is selected, the correct push order is notified.

However, in the game in which the correct pressing order for transitioning to RT3 was informed in RT2, the AT is started from RT1 also when the stop switch 42 can not be operated in the correct pressing order due to the player's operation mistake The Rukoto.
Therefore, depending on the situation, the following methods may be adopted.

.
First, in the game in which the correct pressing order was notified in RT2 (both in push order bell winning and replay B winning), the main game is always played if the stop switch 42 is not operated in correct pressing order. Transition to state 3 can be mentioned. In this case, in RT2, for example, the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won, but also when the player does not operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order, transitioning to the main gaming state 3 Become.
In this first method, although it is not possible to relieve the player's operation mistake, it is not necessary to distinguish whether the condition device won in the game is the push order bell or the transition replay, and the notification is made in RT2. Since it is only necessary to determine whether the pressing order is different from the correct pressing order, it is possible to reduce the processing load (reduction of the capacity) of the main control board 60.

Second, in the main gaming state 2, when the transition replay is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pushing order different from the notified pushing order, transitioning from the next game to the main gaming state 3 is mentioned. On the other hand, in main gaming state 2, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order different from the informed pushing order, the correct pushing order is informed when the pushing order bell is won, the main gaming state 2 Leave as it is.
In this way, even if the stop switch 42 is intentionally operated in the incorrect press order at the time of the transition replay winning, it is not continued to stay in the main gaming state 2. If, for example, in main gaming state 2 and RT 2 as described above, stop switch 42 is operated in incorrect release order when transition replay (replay C) is won, the main gaming state is main gaming state 3 and RT is It becomes RT1. Then, after shifting to the main gaming state 3, in RT and RT2, the correct pressing order for shifting to RT3 is sequentially notified.

  It is considered that the player hardly operates the stop switch 42 in the pushing order different from the pushing order notified intentionally when the correct order is notified when the pushing order bell is won (the player's medal is won Because the number decreases). Therefore, since it is considered that the player has made a push order mistake when a push order incorrect answer at the push order bell win, the remedy in that case is intended. However, unlike the first method, it is necessary to determine whether the condition device won in the game is transition replay or push bell, so that control burden is incurred.

  Thirdly, although different from the present embodiment, for example, when transition replay is won, in the case of having the push order to promote RT, the push order to fall RT and the push order to maintain RT, to fall RT When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order, transition to the main gaming state 3 can be mentioned. By setting in this manner, it is possible to increase the probability of being able to rescue a player who has made a pushing order error. However, when this setting is made, it is necessary to determine that the RT has fallen in addition to the winning of the transition replay and that the pushing order has become incorrect, so the processing load is increased.

  In the main gaming state 2, the main gaming state control means 63k reports the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell is won. Further, in the game in which the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main gaming state 2 and the non-RT mode, the pressing order in which the specific symbol can be stopped and displayed can be notified. Furthermore, when Replay B is won at the time of main gaming state 2 and RT1, the push order (the push order for winning Replay 05) is notified to shift to RT2. Furthermore, at the time of main gaming state 2 and RT2, when Replay C is won, the pushing order (the pushing order for winning Replay 06) is notified to shift to RT3. In the main gaming state 2, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order may not be notified, and only the correct push order (push order to shift the RT) may be notified at the transition replay win. In this way, it is possible to create a gaming state in which medals do not increase during preparation of the AT.

Further, the main gaming state control means 63k, in the main gaming state 3, informs the correct pressing order when the pushing order bell is won, and (when the main gaming state 3 is RT3), the replay 01 or 02 when the replay D is won. It announces the push order (push order to maintain RT3) to win a prize. Therefore, when the AT in the main gaming state 3 is executed while staying at RT3, the RT does not fall if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order at the time of notification of the pressing order of replay.
Furthermore, when the main gaming state 3 is RT3, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order different from the notified pushing order at the time of replay D winning, in the subsequent RT1 and RT2 When the transition replay is won, a push order to promote RT is notified.

  When the AT (1 set) is finished in the main gaming state 3, the main gaming state control means 63k shifts from the next game to the main gaming state 0 or 1. In the present embodiment, the AT stock number is determined as to how many sets of ATs are to be repeated, and at the end of main gaming state 3 (AT), when “AT stock number> 0”, main gaming state 3 to main It shifts to gaming state 1 (AT precursor). Further, at the end of the main gaming state 3, when "the number of AT stock = 0", transition from the main gaming state 3 to the main gaming state 0 (normal time). There are various methods to determine when the AT stock number is "-1". For example, there may be a transition to the main gaming state 3 or a termination of the main gaming state 3.

  Furthermore, when the main gaming state 3 (AT) ends, when “AT stock number> 0”, the number of precursor games is determined when shifting from the main gaming state 3 to the main gaming state 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when determining (or adding) the AT stock number, it is also possible to determine and store the precursor game number of each AT in advance.

When ending in AT in the main gaming state 3 and shifting to the main gaming state 0 (normal time), RT at the time of AT termination is RT3. Then, in RT 3, Replay D is drawn, and if Replay 03 or 04 wins when Replay D is won, the next game is shifted to RT 1.
On the other hand, when the AT ends in the main gaming state 3 and shifts to the main gaming state 1 (AT precursor), RT at the time of AT termination is RT3. Then, in RT 3, Replay D is drawn, and if Replay 03 or 04 wins when Replay D is won, the next game is shifted to RT 1. In this RT1, when the replay B is won, the correct pressing order for winning the replay 05 is not notified until the precursor game number becomes “0”.

  When the number of AT precursor games is digested in the main gaming state 1, the next gaming state is shifted to the main gaming state 2 (AT being prepared). Then, in the main gaming state 2 (and RT1), when the player wins the replay B, the correct pressing order of winning the replay 05 is notified. And if Replay 05 wins, it will shift to RT2. Furthermore, in RT 2, when the replay C is won, the correct order pressing order for winning the replay 06 is notified. When Replay 06 wins, it shifts to RT 3 and shifts to main gaming state 3 and starts AT again.

When the main gaming state 1, that is, when 1 BB is won during the AT sign, it shifts to the main gaming state 6 in which 1BB is inside. The main gaming state 6 at this time is RT4. Further, when 1BB is won in the main gaming state 6, the transition to the main gaming state 7 is made. The main gaming state 7 is RT5 (1 BB gaming). Then, when the main gaming state 7 or the 1BB gaming is ended, the main gaming state 2 is transitioned to during the AT preparation.
Therefore, when the player wins 1 BB while not apportioning the aura game number in the AT precursor, the apogee game number is cleared (set to “0”) at that time. That is, when the 1BB game is ended after passing through the inside of the 1BB, it does not return to the AT precursor (main gaming state 1) but shifts to AT preparation (main gaming state 2).

  Further, when the main gaming state 2 (at AT preparation) or the main gaming state 3 (at AT) is won by 1 BB, similarly to the above, it shifts to the main gaming state 6 inside 1 BB. The main gaming state 6 at this time is RT4. Further, when 1BB is won in the main gaming state 6, the transition to the main gaming state 7 is made. The main gaming state 7 is RT5 (1 BB gaming). Then, when the main gaming state 7 or the 1BB gaming is ended, the main gaming state 2 is transitioned to during the AT preparation.

Here, when the main gaming state 3 (during AT) is won by 1BB, since the game in the main gaming state 3 is temporarily interrupted, the counting of the AT number of times is stopped. Then, after the end of the 1BB game, when returning to the main gaming state 3 (AT) after passing through the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation), the counting of the interrupted AT game number is resumed. It should be noted that instead of doing this, when the 1BB is won during the main gaming state 3 (AT) and the game transitions to the 1BB gaming, after that, when the main gaming state 3 (AT) returns, the initial game count of AT is It may be set again (it may be reset AT game frequency).
In addition, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the AT game frequency is to be added during 1BB winning or 1BB game, and when the lottery is won, the additional value is added to the AT game frequency count value.

When 1BB is won from the main gaming state 1 (AT precursor), the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation), and the main gaming state 3 (AT), and during 1BB inside, 1BB game is executed and 1BB game is ended As shown in FIG. 37, RT is always non-RT. Therefore, when the 1BB game is ended in the main gaming state 7, the main gaming state 2 (AT preparation) and the non-RT state are established. For this reason, a specific symbol is displayed in non-RT, and it shifts to RT1, Replay 05 wins in RT1 and shifts to RT2, and Replay 06 wins in RT2 until it shifts to RT3, main gaming state 2 (AT preparation) ). In RT1 and RT2, when the condition device capable of promoting RT can be selected, the pressing order (the order of pressing the correct answer) for promoting RT is notified.
In addition, when the condition device numbers “42” to “47” are won during non-RT, the pressing order (the pressing order for dropping 3 bells) may be notified to display a specific symbol, or The order of pressing may not be notified. On the other hand, when the condition device numbers “23” to “40” are won in non-RT, the order of pressing the correct answer may be notified or may not be notified.

In FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 controls selection, output, and the like of effects (information) during game play and game standby.
The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 60 transmits information (control command etc.) necessary for effects etc. in one direction to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication Do.
The main control substrate 60 and the sub control substrate 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connections using optical communication means. Further, both of the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Further, like the main control board 60, the sub control board 80 includes an RWM 81, a ROM (sub ROM) 82, a sub CPU 83, and the like.
Here, an MPU including the RWM 81, the ROM 82, and the sub CPU 83 is mounted on the sub control substrate 80. Furthermore, the RWM is mounted outside the MPU (on the sub control board 80) separately from the RWM built into the MPU. Therefore, the RWM 81 is used in the sense that it includes the RWM built in to the MPU and the external RWM.
The RWM (sub memory) 81 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like acquired when the sub CPU 83 controls an effect.
Further, the ROM (sub ROM) 82 is a storage medium for storing, as data for effect, a program for performing a lottery relating to effect, various data, and the like.

Peripheral devices for the following effects as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via an input port or an output port (not shown in FIG. 1). However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The effect lamp 21 is, for example, an LED or the like, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the effect lamp 21 is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols continuing in the vertical direction seen from the display window 13) disposed on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 from behind, the reel 31 A fluorescent lamp for illuminating a symbol on the reel 31 from the top of the frame, a frame lamp which is disposed on the front cover of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a prize is included.

In addition, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and corresponds to various effect images (the order of pushing during 1BB gaming and AT, lottery results of the condition device). Effects, etc., and game information (the number of times of the 1BB game and the number of games played during AT, the number of wins, etc.) are displayed.
In addition, the cross key 24 and the push button 25 are used, for example, when displaying information intended by the player or when a hole manager (such as a store manager) changes various settings.

The sub CPU 83 includes an effect output control means 83a.
As will be described later, the effect output control means 83a is a control command transmitted from the main control board 60, specifically, the operating state, the number of 1BB earned, the main gaming state, the number of predictive games, the number of AT games, the RT state At what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated or when each stop switch 42 is operated) based on the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the feature condition device number, what effect Such as how to turn on, blink or extinguish the lamp 21, what kind of sound to output from the speaker 22, and what kind of image to display on the image display device 23 etc. The specific effect contents are determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control means 83a controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB game or AT, the stop switch 42 is pressed, the number of wins, the number of remaining games, etc. are displayed as an image.
When the non-AT is in progress, the push order instruction number transmits the information “0”. Therefore, when the non-AT is in progress, the sub control board 80 does not notify the correct push order. However, it is possible to inform the pushing order of "left middle right" as a mere effect when a replay device A with a condition device unrelated to the pushing order, for example, winning and replay condition device number "1" is won.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include the information of which condition device number has actually been won, but includes rough win information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number "13" is received, the sub control board 80 can not know which push order bell has been won. However, it is possible to know if one of the push bells has been won. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp with "yellow" that is a corresponding color of "bell".

  Furthermore, when the sub control board 80 receives the push order instruction number transmitted from the main control board 60 during AT (including during AT preparation), the sub control board 80 notifies the correct push order corresponding to the received push order instruction number. . For example, when the player wins the condition device number "24" in the AT game and receives the control command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "2", the right pressing order is "right and left middle" or "132" etc. As in the above, the player is notified of the contents that the player can easily know the correct pressing order.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 60 (main CPU 63) will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a process (M_PRG_START) when the main control board 60 starts the program.
In FIG. 39, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 60 initializes a register in the next step S12. As a specific process, for example, a process of storing the upper address (F0H in this embodiment) of the RWM 61 in the Q register can be mentioned. By this processing, for example, when specifying the address of RWM 61, it is combined with the data (F0H) specified by the Q register by specifying only the lower address (for example, "B7" when specifying address "F0B7"). This makes it possible to specify the address "F0B7" of the RWM 61, which leads to a reduction of the program capacity.

  Next, in step S13, the main control board 60 determines whether the power-off process completion flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processed flag (stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 61; not shown in the present embodiment) is stored in step S652 (FIG. 66) described later. The power-off process completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off has normally been performed when the power is turned on. When it is determined in step S13 that the power-off process completion flag is the normal value ("01" H in this embodiment), the process proceeds to step S14, and the normal value is not ("01" in this embodiment). If it is determined that it is not H), the process proceeds to step S16 without calculating checksum data in steps S14 and S15.

In step S14, calculation of the checksum of the RWM 61 is executed. Specifically, the checksum calculation (target of the work area used by the program, unused area, stack area, for example) is performed in the same range (for example, the program area, unused area, stack area) of the RWM 61 checksum (step S653 in FIG. Perform addition of the data value of the address
In this embodiment, the checksum of the predetermined range of the RWM 61 is performed, and the checksum data of the RWM 61 is set so that the data becomes “0” by the checksum.

In step S15, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 61 for which the current checksum has been calculated, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the calculation of the checksum is not completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.
When initializing data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 61 also in the subsequent processes, in the present embodiment, the same process is executed in the range of the designated RWM 61.

  In step S16, the main control board 60 stores the power failure recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, the B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off process completion flag is the normal value and the checksum data of the RWM 61 is the normal value, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off process completion flag is an abnormal value (when "No" in step S13), and / or the checksum data of RWM 61 is an abnormal value (check of the entire range calculated in step S14) If it is determined that the sum data value is not “0”, an abnormal value is stored as the power failure recovery data.

  In the next step S17, level data of input port 1 (FIG. 8) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, an A register). Next, in step S18, it is determined based on the level data of the input port 1 whether or not the designated switch is on. Here, in the present embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal (D1) of the door switch 16 of the input port 1, a signal (D2) of the setting door switch 54, and a signal (D3) of the setting key switch 52. It is one.

Then, the signal of the door switch 16 is on (the front cover (chassis) is open), the signal of the setting door switch 54 is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key The setting change is permitted only when the signal of the switch 52 is on (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to setting change processing in step S22. However, when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to setting changing processing in step S22. .
That is, although the signal of the door switch 16 is off (the front cover is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch 54 is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch 52 Signal is unlikely to be turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud, so it is not permitted to shift to setting change processing.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19. When it is determined that the all designation switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 60 determines whether the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value. The power failure recovery data is data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S22 while holding that the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value (data stored in step S16). If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether the setting change impossible flag is on. Here, the setting change impossible flag is a D6 bit value of the above-mentioned medal management flag, and it is disabled between the lottery process (step S50) and the game end check process (step S73) of the condition device described later. It is a flag. When the setting change impossible flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21. When the setting change impossible flag is not on, the setting change process of step S22 is performed while holding that the power-off recovery data is a normal value (data stored in step S16). move on. Thus, in the present embodiment, the setting change process when the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value, and the setting change process when the power failure recovery data is a normal value are included.
Although the setting change impossible flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided if the setting change is always possible. In that case, the process corresponding to step S20 is unnecessary.

  In step S21, the main control board 60 determines whether the power failure recovery data has a normal value. This process is equivalent to that at step S19, and refers to the data stored in the register at step S16. Then, if it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23, and the power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform recovery impossible error processing. An error when it is determined in step S21 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value is referred to as an "E1" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E1" is displayed on a predetermined digit. The non-returnable error is an error that can not be canceled unless the setting change process is executed.

As described above, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), the process proceeds to the setting change process when the setting change is possible in both cases where the power failure recovery data is the normal value and the abnormal value.
If the designated switch is not on ("No" in step S18) or if the setting change is not possible, if the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value ("No" in step S21), error processing is not possible. If the power failure recovery data is a normal value ("Yes" in step S21), the process proceeds to power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a power supply recovery process (M_POWER_ON).
First, in step S831, the stack pointer is returned. Here, the stack pointer is one of the registers, and when a power failure occurs, data at the time of power failure (for example, register value, instruction processing (return address) of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) In the area (also referred to as a stack area) of the RWM 61 for storing a), the address of the RWM 61 to be stored next is indicated. That is, the return of the stack pointer refers to a process of storing the stack pointer stored at the time of power-off in the RWM 61 once and re-storing the data stored in the RWM 61 in the stack pointer.
In the next step S 832, the setting value data stored in a predetermined address (not shown in this embodiment) of the RWM 61 is read, and it is determined whether the range of the setting value is a normal range (“1” to “6” Determine whether or not it is within the range). If it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S833. If it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S839, and the process proceeds to an unrecoverable error process. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.

In step S833, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 61 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S834, initialization of the RWM 61 in the range set in step S833 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that values are stored in the RWM 61 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to corruption etc. Therefore, initialize the unused area at power on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S 835, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 61 has been completed. If it is determined that the RWM 61 has been completed, the process proceeds to step S 836. In step S836, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.
Next, proceeding to step S837, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and the interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (2.235 ms in this embodiment) after the process.
Next, the process proceeds to step S 838 to clear the power-off process flag described above, that is, to “0”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the power supply recovery process described above, the interrupt process is activated (step S837) after the reading of the input ports 0 to 2 is executed (step S836). The reason is as follows.
In the present embodiment, the setting key is inserted during the game standby so that the setting value can be confirmed. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1”, it is determined that the confirmation of the set value is ended.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, and the setting key switch 52 is turned off (with the setting key removed) to turn on the power.

In this case, since the fall signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 52 is off by the interrupt processing after the power failure and recovery, the falling of the setting key switch is detected. Ru.
As a result, the state at the time of power failure recovery and the state before the power failure are different. Specifically, in the state before the power failure, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “0”, but the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1” at the time of power failure recovery.
Thus, in order to avoid different states before and after power-off, the value of RWM 61 of the input ports 0 to 2 is updated to the latest state upon power-off and recovery. Therefore, after executing the input port 0 to 2 reading process, the interrupt process is started.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment. Then, during this main processing, interrupt processing (I_INTR; FIG. 64) is performed every 2.235 ms.
In FIG. 41, in step S41, the stack pointer is set. The setting of the stack pointer here executes the same process as the process of step S831 described above.
In the next step S42, a game start set process (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. If it progresses to step S42, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 42 mentioned later.

In the next step S43, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time.
In the next step S44, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S43.
If it is determined in step S44 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S46. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S45 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and the process proceeds to step S46.

  At step S46, management processing of the inserted medal is performed. Although the details of this process will not be described, the outline of the process is detecting the rising of the signals of the input sensors 44 and 44b and the bet switch 40 and the rising of the signal of the settlement switch 46, and inserting the medals by the input sensors 44a and 44b. When it is detected, the process proceeds to the medal maintenance check process, and when it is determined that the medal maintenance is normal, the process proceeds to the bet process or the storage addition process. When the rise of the signal of the bet switch 40 is detected, the process proceeds to the storage bet process, and when the rise of the signal of the settlement switch 46 is detected, the process proceeds to the settlement process.

  At the next step S47, the software random number is updated. This processing is processing for updating (for example, adding “1” each) processing random numbers for processing (calculation processing) to random numbers (hard random numbers or built-in random numbers) used in the conditional device lottery means 63 b. Soft random numbers are 16-bit random numbers having a range of 0-65535. Note that, as an update method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) is added to a value before update.

  In the next step S48, the main control board 60 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is operated, the process proceeds to step S49. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S43. In addition, even when the start switch 41 is operated, when the bet number has not reached the defined number of the game, it is determined as "No" in step S48. If the specified number is reached, the start switch acceptance permission flag (the "D0" bit of the medal management flag) is turned on.

In step S49, the process at the time of accepting the start switch is executed. In this process, the internal random number is read, the blocker 45 is turned off, the rotation of the reel 31 is started, and it is determined whether the set value is normal.
In step S50, the condition device lottery means 63b executes the condition device lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of the condition device lottery is acquired in step S49. Then, in step S50, it is determined using the condition device lottery table whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any one of the condition device numbers.

In the next step S51, the AT lottery means 63c executes the AT lottery using the above-mentioned AT lottery table (FIG. 33) based on the winning condition device. In this lottery, in addition to winning the AT, the AT does not win, but the AT lottery state may shift.
Next, proceeding to step S52, the main gaming state control means 63k updates the main gaming state in the game. For example, when the AT is won in the lottery of step S51, control is performed to update from the main gaming state 0 to the main gaming state 1 (AT precursor).

In the next step S53, the main control board 60 (in particular, the pressing order instruction number selecting unit 63e) executes a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF). This process is a process of selecting a push order instruction number or the like according to the current main gaming state and the condition device which has won. If it progresses to step S53, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 52 mentioned later. Although details will be described later, in the game in which the pushing order instruction information is displayed, the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 by this process.
Next, proceeding to step S54, the main control board 60 (in particular, the effect group number selection means 63f) executes an effect group number setting process (M_ACT_GRP). This process is a process of selecting the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device. If it progresses to step S54, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 54 mentioned later.

In the next step S55, interrupt processing is inhibited. The interrupt processing is prohibited here in order to prevent the interrupt processing from being performed during execution of the symbol stop signal setting processing (S_IF2_SET) of the next step S56.
Then, the process proceeds to step S56 to execute symbol stop signal setting processing. This process is a process for transmitting (outputting) information (test signal) of the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42 from the slot machine 10 to the test machine based on the condition device winning in the game is there. If it progresses to step S56, it will transfer to the process of FIG.

When the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are connected, a symbol stop signal is transmitted (outputted) to the testing machine in step S56 every game at the start of the game in the main processing. On the other hand, when the slot machine 10 is put on the market (when installed in a hall or the like), the slot machine 10 is not connected to the test machine, so an actual symbol stop signal is sent to the test machine Although it does not do, for example, even after being installed in the hall, the process of step S56 is executed every game.
After step S56, the process proceeds to step S57, and the interrupt process prohibited in step S55 is permitted.

The command transmission table 2 set process in the next step S58 is a process of storing the top address at which the data of the command transmission table 2 is stored in the HL register. Here, as shown in FIG. 44 described later, the top address at which the data of the command transmission table 2 is stored is “1D 32”. Therefore,
HL register value = 1D32
It becomes.
In the next step S59, control command continuous set processing (M_CMD_LIST) is executed. This process is a process for transmitting a command to the sub control board 80 based on the command transmission table 2 set in step S58. If it progresses to step S59, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 45 mentioned later.

Next, at step S60, reel rotation start preparation processing (M_REEL_READY) is executed. If it progresses to step S60, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 58 mentioned later.
Next, proceeding to step S61, the reel control means 63g starts the rotation of the reel 31. In the next step S62, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the condition device and the position of the reel 31 Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  In the next step S63, the reel control means 63g checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S64. In step S64, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S65. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S62. .

In step S65, when pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 in the game, in order to erase the information, a process of clearing acquired sheet data is performed. This processing is processing for setting the acquired number data of the address "F00E" to "0".
In the next step S66, display determination of a symbol is performed. Here, it is determined by the prize determination means 63h whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. Then, the symbol combination flag (_FL_WIN) is updated according to the combination of the stopped symbols. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of replay has stopped at the effective line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
Next, at step S67, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error of a symbol has occurred, the process proceeds to step S76, and if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S68.

  Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined by the stop position determination table. However, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined that it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S76 and error processing is not possible Run. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an "E5" error, and the acquired number display LED 72 displays "E5" to stop the main processing.

When a non-return error occurs, it is necessary to turn on / off the power and reset the setting value in order to cancel the error. When an unrecoverable error occurs, turn off the power, insert the setting key and turn it 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the power. Thereby, the predetermined range (setting value information, RT information, winning combination information) of the RWM 61 is cleared. Then, the setting value is set, and if there is no other error, return processing is performed.
On the other hand, when a recoverable error such as a full error occurs, the error content is displayed and the process is stopped. However, when the store clerk executes the error release operation (removes the error cause) and operates the reset switch 53 It is determined whether or not the error is released, and when it is determined that the error is released, the process is resumed.

In step S68, the medal payout number updating process (FIG. 59) is performed according to the winning combination. In this process, based on the display determination in step S66, when the small winning combination (combination having medal payout) is won, medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the number corresponding to the winning combination, and medal payout number data Update the buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).
In the next step S69, it is determined whether or not a special winning combination (1BB) has been won. When it is determined that the special combination is won, the process proceeds to step S70, and when it is determined that the special combination is not won, the process proceeds to step S72.
In step S70, the waiting time for winning a special combination is set. This process is a process of setting a predetermined value in the BC register. In this embodiment, "2000" (corresponding to about 4470 ms) is set in the BC register. More specifically, B register value = "3" (00000011B) and C register value = "208" (11101000B) are set. Then, in the next step S71, a 2-byte wait process (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT) is executed. If it progresses to step S71, it will transfer to FIG. 49 mentioned later.

  In this way, setting the wait time when winning a special combination is achieved by outputting an effect at the time of winning a special combination on the side of the sub control board 80 during that time, and during the effect time, the player sets the bet switch 40 This is to prevent the effect cancellation by the operation. As described above, by providing the wait time in the main process and stopping the main process, it is possible to surely show the player the effect at the time of winning the special combination. The interrupt process is configured to be executed even while executing the 2-byte time wait process (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT).

In the next step S72, the payout means 63i pays out the medals corresponding to the winning combination. In this process, when the number of stored sheets is less than "50", addition processing of the number of stored sheets is performed until the number of stored sheets reaches "50", and when the number of stored sheets becomes "50" or more, the hopper motor 36 Is controlled to pay out the medals from the hopper 35a to the player.
Next, the process proceeds to step S73. At step S73, the main control board 60 performs a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). If it progresses to step 72, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 61 mentioned later.

  In step S73, the signal of the full sensor 38 which is the D5 bit of the input port 2 is determined, and when it is on, a full error is displayed. The full error is referred to as "FE error" in the present embodiment, and the acquisition number display LED 72 displays "FE".

In the next step S74, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of setting a control command for transmitting to the sub control board 80 that one game is over.
Although “output request set” is often executed in the processing described below, it means processing to set a control command for transmission to the sub control board 80 as in step S74. Do. Moreover, the control command here does not mean only the control command to be actually transmitted, but also means the control command that is the source of the control command to be actually transmitted.
Next, in step S75, the main control board 60 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process is a process of storing the control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD of the addresses “F113” to “F153”).
And if the process of step S75 is complete | finished, it will return to step S40 again.
As described above, the main processing shown in FIG. 41 is repeated for each game.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S42 of FIG.
First, in step S80, the game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown) of the RWM 61). In the present embodiment, the “26846” interrupt (≒ 60000 ms, ie, about 60 seconds (one minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in this step S81, the value is decremented by one each time the interrupt processing is performed from this time.

  When the game standby display time is "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S45 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is "9" and the player settles by operating the settlement switch 43 and the game is over, "00" is displayed after about one minute. Be done. This has the effect that the number of vacant tables can be reduced by the fact that a store clerk or another player in the hall can recognize them as vacant tables.

Next, the process proceeds to step S81, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process corresponds to a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored at the address "F0B8" of the RWM 61.
In the next step S82, data of a symbol combination display flag is acquired. This processing is processing for storing the symbol combination on the activated line after the stop of the reel 31 in the previous game, that is, the data of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) in the A register.
In the next step S83, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol has been displayed. In this process, when the D3 bit stored in the A register value is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operating symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S84, and when it is determined that the 1BB operating pattern is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S87.

  In step S84, the obtainable number of sheets during 1BB operation (1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing (storing) the value of "450" in the above-mentioned "_CT_BIG_PAY" (RWM 61). The "450" is the maximum obtainable number of 1BB games. Then, the process proceeds to step S87.

In the next step S87, an operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. In step S87, the following processes 1) to 5) are executed.
1) First, store the address of the operating status flag in the HL register. As described above, since the address of the operation status flag is "F015", the H register value = "F0" and the L register value = "15".
2) Next, the A register value and the information of the address stored in the HL register are subjected to "OR" operation, and the operation result is stored in the A register. Here, the data of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is stored in the A register in step S82, and the information of the address stored in the HL register is the information of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION).

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1)
When a combination of 1BB symbols is displayed,
A register value: 00001000B
Information value of address of HL register: 00000000 B
A register value after “OR” operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Example 2)
If the 1BB symbol combination is already displayed, and 1BB and RB are in operation,
A register value: 00000000 B
Information value of address of HL register: 00011000 B
A register value after “OR” operation: 00011000 B
It becomes.

Example 3)
When the 1BB symbol combination is already displayed and the 1BB is in operation but the RB is not in operation,
A register value: 00000000 B
Information value of address of HL register: 00001000B
A register value after “OR” operation: 00001000B
It becomes.

3) Store the A register value in the C register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000B
C register value: 00001000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00011000B

4) AND the information stored in the A register and the information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1", and store the operation result in the A register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000B
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000B
A register value after AND operation: 00001000B
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000B
A register value after AND operation: 00001000B

5) The A register value is rotationally shifted to the left, and the result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
A register value (before calculation): 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00010000B

In the next step S88, the operating state flag is updated. This process is a process of "OR" ing the A register value and the C register value, and storing the calculation result in the A register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1)
A register value: 00010000 B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000 B
Example 2)
A register value: 00010000 B
C register value: 00011000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000 B
Example 3)
A register value: 00010000 B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after operation): 00011000 B

Further, in the next step S89, the operating state flag is stored (stored). This process is a process of storing the value stored in the A register in the address of the RWM 61 (that is, the operating state flag) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the information of the operation state flag updated in step S88 is replaced with the information of the previous operation state flag.
For example, as shown in Example 1, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1".
Also, as in Example 2, when 1BB and RB are in operation, the state is maintained (D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag and D4 bit corresponding to RB are “1”).

  Furthermore, as in Example 3, when the 1BB is in operation but the RB is not in operation, the D4 bit corresponding to the RB of the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1". The details of this point will be described later, but in the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the 2 games (or when winning twice), but in the 1BB game When the end condition is not satisfied (when the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), "1" is set in this step S89 (game start set).

In the next step S90, it is determined whether the RB operation has started. In this process, the information stored in the A register and the information stored in the C register are XORed, the operation result is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". It is.
Taking the above example 1) to example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00001000B
A register value (after “XOR” operation): 00010000 B (zero flag ≠ 1)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000B
C register value: 00011000B
A register value (after "XOR" operation): 00000000 B (zero flag = 1)

Then, when the zero flag = “1”, it is determined as “No” and the process proceeds to step S92, and when the zero flag ≠ “1”, it is determined as “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S91. As described above, in step S90,
a) At the start of the 1BB game b) After the completion of the RB operation, if the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, it is judged as "Yes".
In the next step S91, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. This processing corresponds to the processing of storing (storing) "2" in the game number counter "_CT_BONUS_PLAY" at the time of RB operation and storing (storing) "2" in the number-of-winnings counter "_CT_BONUS_WIN" at the time of RB operation . Then, the process proceeds to step S92.

  The game number counter "_CT_BONUS_PLAY" at the time of RB operation and the number-of-times counter "_CT_BONUS_WIN" at the time of RB operation are both set to "2" as initial values, and the number of times of game or the number of times of prize is "1" This counter is decremented by one each time it increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to “0”, and each time the number of games or the number of wins increases by “1”, it is incremented by “1”, and these counter values are “2”. It may be determined whether or not

  In the next step S92, it is determined based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S82 whether or not a combination of symbols of replay is displayed (replay has won). If it is determined that the combination of symbols of replay is displayed, the process proceeds to step S93, and if it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S95.

In step S93, the main control board 60 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game. Next, proceeding to step S94, the automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of updating data of "_NB_REP_MEDAL" storing the automatic bet number ("3" is stored).
Next, in step S95, the command transmission table 1 is set. This process is a process of storing the top address at which the data of the command transmission table 1 is stored in the HL register. Here, as shown in FIG. 43, the top address at which the data of the command transmission table 1 is stored is “1D1F”. Therefore,
HL register value = 1D1F
It becomes.

  In the next step S59, control command continuous set processing (M_CMD_LIST) is executed. This process is a process for transmitting a command to the sub control board 80 based on the command transmission table 1 set in step S95. If it progresses to step S59, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 45 mentioned later. Then, the process proceeds to step S97, and proceeds to medal acceptance start processing (MS_MEDAL_START) (FIG. 48).

FIG. 43A shows the command transmission table 1 set in step S95, and FIG. 43B shows the relationship between each data in the command transmission table 1 and an address.
In the figure, “(TBL_CMD_LEV1_E-$ − 1) / 2” in the first line in (A) defines the number of command transmissions, and this data is an address “1D1F” as in (B) in the figure. It means that the value is "06H". "(TBL_CMD_LEV1_E-$-1) / 2" indicates a value obtained by dividing the number ("12") from "1D20" to "1D2B" which is an address constituting command data by "2", and the value Becomes "6".

In the present embodiment, each address stores one byte data, and one control command transmitted to the sub control means 80 consists of two byte data. For example, in the operation state, the upper one byte data is “@CMD_ACTION”, and the lower one byte data is “_FL_ACTION”. The upper 1 byte data is control command data (definition data) that means a command type, and the lower 1 byte data is control command data that means its contents (variables). In FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 described later, “LOW” indicates lower data.
Here, the data of “_FL_ACTION” means data of the operating state flag of the address “F015”. Therefore, “15H” is stored in the address “1D20” in the command transmission table 1. This data indicates that the lower address of the RWM 61 is "15". In the present embodiment, “F0H” is stored in the Q register as an address indicating the upper address when power is turned on (Q register value = F0H).

Also, "@CMD_ACTION" is definition data of the operating state, and is stored in the address "1D21" in the present embodiment.
As described above, the command in the operation state is "32H (00110010B)" in which the upper 1 byte data is stored in the address "1D21", and the lower 1 byte data is the value stored in the address "F015". For example, when "00000001" is stored in "F015", the control command indicating the operation state is "00110010/00000001"("/" indicates a boundary between upper data and lower data).

The command data indicating the number of 1BB acquired (lower order) is data in which upper order data is “@CMD_BB_LOW” which is definition data and lower order data is “LOW_CT_BIG_PAY + 0”. The definition data “@CMD_BB_LOW” is “41H” stored at the address “1D23”, and the lower data is the value stored at the address “1D22” as the lower address (the upper address is “F0 as above. Data), that is, data stored in “F060”.
As for the command data indicating the number of 1BB acquired (upper), the upper data is “@CMD_BB_HIG” which is the definition data and the lower data is “LOW_CT_BIG_PAY + 1” as described above. The definition data “@CMD_BB_HIG” is “42H” stored at the address “1D25”, and the lower data is the value stored at the address “1D24” as the lower address (the upper address is “F0 as above. Data), that is, data stored in “F061”.

In the command data indicating the main gaming state, the upper data corresponds to the definition data "@ CMD_INF1", and this value is "60H" stored in the address "1D27". The lower data is “LOW_NB_GAM_STS”, and the data of the address for which the value stored in the address “1D26” is the lower value (the upper address is “F0” as above, the same shall apply hereinafter), It becomes data stored in "F08F".
As for the command data indicating the number of prognostic games and the number of AT games, the upper data corresponds to the definition data "@ CMD_INF2", and this value is "61 H" stored in the address "1 D 29". The lower data is “LOW_CT_GAM_STS”, and the value stored in the address “1D28” is data of an address whose lower value is, ie, data stored in “F099”.

In the command data indicating the RT state, the upper data corresponds to the definition data "@CMD_RT_STS", and this value is "33H" stored in the address "1D2B". The lower data is “LOW_NB_RT_STS”, and the data stored in the address “1D2A” is data of an address whose lower is lower, ie, data stored in “F001”.
As described above, in the command data determined by the command transmission table 1 in the present embodiment, each data is stored in order from the address “1D1F” to “1D2B” of the RWM 61.

  Although it is apparent from the above, in the present embodiment, six control commands are transmitted using the command transmission table 1 for each game. For this reason, for example, even when 1BB is not in play, the 1BB-acquired number (lower rank) and (upper rank) are transmitted. It is natural that the data of the number of 1BB earned when not playing 1BB is "0". For example, it is also conceivable to transmit the 1BB winning number (lower rank) and (upper rank) only when it is determined whether the game is in 1BB and it is determined that 1BB is in play.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, even if the 1BB game is not in progress, if the control command of the 1BB winning number (low order) and (high order) is transmitted as data of “0”, the game is 1BB game in progress. Since the transmission of the control command based on the control command transmission table 1 can be executed without determining whether there is any, it is possible to simplify the process.
In addition, upon transmission of control commands using the command transmission table 1, the transmission order of control commands of the operating state, 1BB acquisition number, main gaming state, precursor game number, AT game number, and RT state is shown in FIG. 43. It is not limited to the ones, and is not limited to these six types of control commands.

FIG. 44A shows the command transmission table 2 set in step S58 in FIG. 41, and FIG. 44B shows the relationship between each data in the command transmission table 2 and the address. .
In (A) of the figure, "(TBL_CMD_LEV2_E-$-1) / 2" in the first line defines the number of command transmissions, and as shown in (B) of this data, the address "1D32" The value is “03H”. "(TBL_CMD_LEV2_E-$-1) / 2" refers to the value obtained by dividing the number ("6") from the address "1D33" to "1D38" that composes command data by "2", and the value is " It will be 3 ".

As described in the command transmission table 1, each address stores 1 byte data, and one control command to be sent to the sub control means 80 is 2 bytes data. For example, in the push order instruction number, the upper 1 byte data is “@CMD_ORD_INF”, and the lower 1 byte data is “LOW_NB_ORD_INF”.
“@CMD_ORD_INF” is definition data of a push order instruction number, and is “39H” stored in the address “1D34” in this embodiment.
The lower order data of the push order designation number is the data of the address whose value stored in the address “1D33” becomes lower, ie, the data stored in “F0B8”.

  From the above, the control command of the push order designation number is “39H (00111001B)” in which the upper 1 byte data is stored in the address “1D34”, and the lower 1 byte data is the value stored in the address “F0B8” Become. For example, when “00000100” is stored in “F0B8”, the command data indicating the pressing order designation number is “00111001/00000100” (“/” indicates the boundary between upper data and lower data).

As for the command data indicating the effect group number, the upper data corresponds to the definition data “@CMD_ACT_GRP”, and this value is “3AH” stored in the address “1D36”. The lower data is “LOW_NB__ACT_GRP”, and the data stored in the address “1D35” becomes the data of the lower address, ie, the data stored in “F0B7”.
In the command data indicating the item condition device number, the upper data corresponds to the definition data "@CMD_CND_BNS", and this value is "3BH" stored in the address "1D38". The lower data is “LOW_CND_BNS”, and the data stored in the address “1D37” becomes the lower data, ie, data stored in “F040”.

As described above, in the command data determined by the command transmission table 2 in the present embodiment, each data is stored in order from the address “1D32” to “1D38” of the RWM 61.
In the transmission of control commands using the command transmission table 2, the transmission order of control commands of push order instruction number, effect group number, and item condition device number is limited to that shown in FIG. Nor is it limited to these three types of control commands.

The command transmission tables 1 and 2 described above are stored in the data area shown in FIG. 2, so that the program area can be prevented from being compressed.
Specifically, rather than performing the process of specifying the address of the data to be transmitted using the program stored in the program area each time, the transmission program is stored in the program area, and the above command is stored in the data area. If the transmission table is stored, transmission processing can be performed only by referring to the command transmission table. In particular, in the case where there are two timings where it is desirable to transmit control commands continuously as in the present embodiment, the programs used are the same, which leads to the capacity reduction.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a control command continuous set (M_CMD_LIST), which corresponds to the process of step S59 of FIG. 41 or step S96 of FIG.
The command transmission number set in step S201 corresponds to processing for storing data of an address indicated by the value stored in the HL register in the B register. As described above, when the command transmission table 1 set process (step S95 in FIG. 42) or the command transmission table 2 set process (step S58 in FIG. 41) is executed, the head address of the command transmission table 1 or command transmission table 2 respectively. Are stored in the HL register. Data corresponding to the number of command transmissions is stored at the top address. For example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “1D1F” is already stored in the HL register.

The control command continuous set when the command transmission table 1 is set will be described below.
First, as described above, when the command transmission table 1 is set, “1D1F” is already stored in the HL register.
Therefore, when the data of the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register is stored in the B register,
B register value = 06H (number of command transmissions)
It becomes.
In the next step S202, the table address is updated. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored in the HL register. For example, when the above command transmission table 1 is set,
HL register value = 1D20 (H)
It becomes.

Next, in step S203, a control command is acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register. For example, when the HL register value is "1D20", as shown in FIG.
E register value = 15 (H)
It becomes.
(2) "1" is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the D register.
In the above example
HL register value = 1D21 (H)
D register value = 32 (H)
It becomes.
(3) Add "1" to the HL register value.
In the above example
HL register value = 1D22 (H)
It becomes.

Next, at step S204, control command set 1 processing (R_CMD_SET) is executed. If it progresses to step S204, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 46 mentioned later. This process is a process for transmitting a control command to the sub control board 80.
Next, in step S205, it is determined whether the present process is completed. In step S205, first, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. Then, it is determined whether the B register value is "0". If it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the control command continuous setting process is ended, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the B register value is not "0", the process returns to step S203.

  By the above processing, for example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, six control commands, which are the number of command transmissions, are generated. As described above, one control command is composed of upper one byte data (definition data) and lower one byte data (variable data). Then, each time a control command is generated, a process for transmitting to the sub control board 80 is performed by the control command set 1 process of step S204.

On the other hand, when the command transmission table 2 is set, the process of FIG. 45 is as follows.
First, in step S201, "1D32" is already stored in the HL register. Therefore, when processing is performed to store data of the address indicated by the value stored in the HL register in the B register,
B register value = 03 H
It becomes.

In the next step S202, the table address is updated. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored in the HL register. Thus, in this example
HL register value = 1D33 (H)
It becomes.

Next, in step S203, a control command is acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register. For example, when the HL register value is "1D33" as described above, as shown in FIG.
E register value = B8 (H)
It becomes.
(2) "1" is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the D register.
In this example
HL register value = 1D34 (H)
D register value = 39 (H)
It becomes.
(3) Add "1" to the HL register value.
In this example
HL register value = 1D35 (H)
It becomes.

Next, at step S204, control command set 1 processing (R_CMD_SET) (FIG. 46) is executed.
Then, the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether the present process is completed. In step S205, first, “1” is subtracted from the B register value. Then, it is determined whether the B register value is "0". If it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the control command continuous setting process is ended, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the B register value is not "0", the process returns to step S203.

  By the above processing, for example, when the command transmission table 2 is set, three control commands which are the number of command transmissions are generated. As described above, one control command is composed of upper one byte data (definition data) and lower one byte data (variable data). Then, each time a control command is generated, a process for transmitting to the sub control board 80 is performed by the control command set 1 process of step S204.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing processing of control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).
First, in step S501, the second control command is acquired. This process is a process of obtaining the address of the RWM 61 based on the data stored in the Q register and the E register, and storing the data stored in the address of the RWM 61 in the A register.
Here, “F0” is stored in the Q register when the power is turned on. A predetermined value is stored in the E register in step S203 of FIG. For example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, "15H" is stored in the E register in the first process. Then, the address when the Q register value is the upper address and the E register value is the lower address, that is, the value stored in “F015” (the value of the operation state flag) is stored in the A register value.
Furthermore, the data stored in the A register is stored in the E register.
As described above, the data of the operation state flag is stored in the A register and the E register.

In the next step S502, interrupt disable processing is performed. This process is the same as step S55. In the next step S503, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) (FIG. 47) is executed. Then, the processing proceeds to step S504, and cancellation of the interrupt processing prohibited in step S502 (that is, interrupt permission) is executed. By the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited while the control command set 2 is being executed.
Then, in the control command set 2, the control command is written as described below, but the interrupt processing is prohibited as described above while the control command set 2 is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to the execution of the interrupt processing during the write processing of the control command.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the inhibition / cancellation of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing to execute the next interrupt processing (within 2.235 ms from the time of disabling the interrupt processing) has arrived after the interrupt processing is inhibited in step S502. Then, the main CPU 63 clears the interrupt flag when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing.
When the timing for executing the interrupt processing has come, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether to enable or disable the interrupt processing.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET).
First, in step S511, the address of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process of setting the start address of the control command buffer.
Specifically, a value obtained by adding "1" to the start address of the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD) ("F 113" in the present embodiment as shown in FIG. 16), that is, "F 114" is stored in the HL register . By this,
HL register value = F114
It becomes.

In the next step S512, the control command write pointer value is acquired. The control command write pointer is for specifying to which address of the RWM 61 the data of the control command is to be written. Since the write pointer at the present time is stored, the write pointer is read. The control command write pointer value (_NB_CMDSTORE) is stored in the address “F018” of the RWM 61 (FIG. 16).
The processing here stores the control command write pointer value in the A register value. For example, when the control command write pointer value (the value stored in “F018”) is “1”, the A register value is “1”.

In the next step S513, the designated address is acquired. In this process, the write address (of the RWM 61) is obtained from the start address of the control command buffer and the data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Specifically, processing is performed in which the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value. For example,
HL register value = F114 (H)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value (after addition) = F115 (H)
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S514, the data of the designated address is acquired. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 of the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocess.
Specifically, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In the above example
HL register value = F115 (H)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value (after addition) = F116 (H)
It becomes.

At “control command <64?” In the next step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the data of the designated address (the A register value stored in step S514) is “0”. , “Yes”.
Here, “No” is determined in step S515 when the A register value is not “0”. If the A register value is not "0", it means that data has already been written in the control command buffer of the address indicated by the control command write pointer value (_NB_CMDSTORE), and data can not be written to the address. In this way, when there is data at the designated address, the data writing process is not executed, so that overwriting when there is data at the designated address is prevented.
When it is judged as "Yes" at Step S515, it progresses to Step S516, and when it is judged as "No", the processing by this flowchart is ended.

In "store control command in RWM" in the next step S516, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value. Then, the E register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and the D register value is stored in the address indicated by the “HL + 1” register value. That is,
HL register value = HL register value-1
E register value = value of address indicated by HL register value D register value = “HL + 1” value of address indicated by register value
For example, when the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S516 is "F116",
E register value = value stored in address “F115” D register value = value stored in address “F116”
Here, the data stored in the D register and the data stored in the E register become one control command. The data stored in the D register is definition data indicating a command type, and the data stored in the E register is variable data indicating the content of the command type.

In the next step S517, the control command write pointer value is updated.
In this process, first, the control command write pointer value (the value stored at the address "F018") is stored in the HL register.
Next, "1" is added to the value stored in the HL register. Here, when “64 (decimal number)” is exceeded as a result of adding “1”, “0” is set.
Then, the value after addition (the value stored in the HL register) is stored in the control command write pointer value (address “F018”). At this point, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, in each game, the game start set (MS_GAME_SET), six control commands defined in the command transmission table 1 are transmitted (steps S95 and S96). Furthermore, after the lottery of the condition device, three control commands defined in the command transmission table 2 are transmitted (steps S58 and S59).
Here, among the three control commands defined in the command transmission table 2, information of whether or not the item condition device number (F040), ie, whether or not 1BB is won, is transmitted to the sub control board 80. On the contrary, the winning and replay condition device number of the address "F039" is not transmitted. As a result, for example, even if the sub-control board 80 or the communication line between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80 is made goto, it is prevented that the winning and replay condition device number is illegally known can do.

Further, as defined in the command transmission table 2, the pushing order instruction number (information stored in the address “F0B8”) is transmitted to the sub control board 80 every game. However, in FIG. 52, which will be described later, when the instruction state is not at step S214, that is, during non-AT, the push order instruction number is not stored in RWM 61 (address "F0B8") at step S218. It becomes "0". For this reason, in the non-AT game, even if the game is won by the push order bell (for example, the conditional device number "23" etc.), the push order instruction number stored in the RWM 61 is "0". The order designation number “0” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Therefore, similarly to the above, it is impossible to illegally acquire the pressing order instruction number (the correct pressing order) by the goto action and operate the stop switch 42 (to obtain the high bell) in the correct pressing order in the game. In this way, it is possible to prevent a goto act due to an unauthorized acquisition of the correct-touching order.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect group numbers are transmitted, but the effect group numbers do not have a one-to-one correspondence with the condition device numbers as shown in FIG. Therefore, for example, in the game in which the sub control board 80 receives the information of the effect group number "13", it can be determined that any of the winning and replay condition device numbers "23" to "28" has been won. Also, it is impossible to determine which prize and replay condition device number has been won specifically. Therefore, the order of correct answer in the game is not known. Therefore, similarly to the above, even if the effect group number is illegally obtained by the goto action, it is impossible to know the order of pressing the correct answer in the game, so the goto action can be prevented.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S97 of FIG.
First, in step S131, the bet medal number data is cleared. That is, the bet number in the previous game is cleared, and more specifically, the value of the medal bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is set to “0”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S132, and the process of turning off the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to set the D0 to D2 bits of the number-of-inputs display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) to “0”.
In the next step S133, the medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, the D0, D2 to D4, D6 and D7 bits of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) are set to "0".

  In the next step S134, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. The operation state flag is checked here in order to determine whether or not the replay operation is in progress in the next step S135. In the present embodiment, in step S134, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is read.

Next, proceeding to step S135, it is determined based on the reading in step S134 whether or not the replay operation is in progress, that is, whether or not the D0 bit is "1". When it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", that is, when the replay operation is in progress, the process proceeds to step S136, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S148.
If it is determined that it is not at the time of replay operation and the process proceeds to step S148, a process of turning on the blocker 45 is executed, and the process according to this flowchart ends. When the blocker 45 is turned on, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are not returned but are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and are sent to the hopper 35a. That is, when the replay is not activated, the maintenance insertion of the medal is uniformly permitted.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start process of this flowchart, the processes after step S136 correspond to the automatic bet process of medals at the time of replay operation.

  In step S136, the standby time at the time of replay operation is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 500 ms as the wait time, the count value “237” of the number of interrupts (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) is set. Therefore, "00000000B" is set as the B register value, and "11101101B" is set as the C register value. Next, in step S137, a 2-byte time waiting process is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0".

This standby process is provided to prevent the replay display LED 73a from lighting up immediately after the end of the game (step S141) and preventing automatic betting immediately after the end of the game (step S144). , Because this is not desirable). Thereby, the timing of the automatic bet can be made appropriate.
Furthermore, for example, at the time of replay winning, it is possible to provide the player with an effect at the time of replay winning (including the sound effect at the time of replay winning etc.) to the player using the 2-byte waiting process (2-byte waiting process) Because during the game progress is stopped, it can not be canceled production)).

Further, the bet sound at the time of the automatic bet is output based on the control command stored in step S142 and step S143.
In addition, it is possible to make the wait time different according to the type of replay that has won. For example, at the time of transition replay winning, a wait time may be set which is different from that at the time of normal replay winning (which is longer than that at the time of normal replay winning).

Next, proceeding to step S138, the stored number of sheets is read (a process of reading how many sheets are currently stored). Here, the stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT_LED) is read to check the stored number.
In the next step S139, it is determined whether or not the stored number is the limit number (50 in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the number is the limit, the process proceeds to step S141. If it is determined that the number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S140. The process here is

In step S140, the blocker is controlled to be turned on, that is, to allow acceptance of medals. Then, the process proceeds to step S141.
As described above, first, when the replay is not activated, the blocker 45 is always turned on to permit acceptance of medals. Even when the replay operation is not in progress, the bet medals (three in the normal game) are consumed even if the stored number is the upper limit number (50 sheets) in the previous game, and it is possible to bet for that amount .

Second, when the number of stored medals is not the limit during replay operation, the blocker 45 is turned on to permit acceptance of medals. If the number of stored medals is not the limit, it is possible to at least add the number of stored medals by maintenance of the medals.
Furthermore, thirdly, at the time of replay operation, when the number of stored medals is the limit number, the blocker 45 is not turned on (the blocker 45 is maintained in the off state until then). When the replay is activated and the number of stored medals is the upper limit, the medals can not be bet and the number of stored medals can not be added, so that medals are not accepted.

In step S141, lighting processing of the replay display LED is performed. In this step S141, processing is performed to turn on ("1") the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS).
The process of actually turning on the replay display LED 73a is performed by the LED display control of step S606 in the interrupt process (FIG. 64) described later.
As described above, since the lighting process of the replay display LED 73a is performed after the execution of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S137, the replay display LED 73a is not illuminated at the moment when the replay is displayed (winning). It will light up after about 0.5 seconds after being done.

Then, in the next step S142, an output request setting process for transmitting a command indicating that automatic betting has been performed is performed on the sub control board 80, and in the next step S143, the control command set 1 process is performed. .
In the next step S144, a process of adding one medal (here, an automatic betting process is meant), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals is made one by one to make an automatic bet based on a replay winning. Do the processing. If it progresses to step S144, it will transfer to FIG. 51 mentioned later.

Next, proceeding to step S145, the standby time for automatic bet based on replay is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” of the number of interrupts (46 × 2.235 ms = about 103 ms) is set. Therefore, "00000000B" is set as the B register value, and "00101110B" is set as the C register value. Next, proceeding to step S146, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0". When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S146 is completed, the process proceeds to step S147, where it is determined whether or not the medal limit number (3 sheets) has been reached. Do.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of medals has not reached the limit, the process returns to step S144, and the one medal addition (automatic bet) process is executed again.

  As described above, in the automatic bet at the time of replay winning, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S145 and S146 is executed according to the automatic betting of medals one by one. Is executed every about 100 ms. As a result, the number-of-inputs display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) is also updated every about 100 ms. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g sequentially light up (approximately every 100 ms). Furthermore, when the automatic bet sound (sound such as "pull") is output from the speaker 22 on the side of the sub control board 80, it is possible to synchronize the change in lighting of the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g with the automatic bet sound.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 48, it is determined in step S139 whether or not it is the storage limit number, and if it is not the storage limit number, a process of turning on the blocker 45 to enable maintenance input of medals (step Although S140) was performed, it is also possible to set, for example, that the maintenance insertion of the medal is disabled at the time of replay play. In such a control, when it is determined in step S135 that the replay operation is in progress, the processes in steps S138 to S140 may be eliminated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing 2-byte time wait processing (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT).
In step S31, it is determined whether a 2-byte waiting time has elapsed. In this process, the value of the BC register is determined, and it is determined whether it is "0" (whether the B register value is "0" and the C register value is "0"). Specifically, for example, when the B register value = "1" and the C register value = "0", it is determined that the value is not "0". Alternatively, when the B register value = “0” and the C register value = “0”, it is determined to be “0”.
If it is determined in step S31 that the value is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S32.

  In step S32, an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT; FIG. 50) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interruption time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, when the interrupt waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S33, the update process of the waiting time is performed, and the process returns to step S31. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value. Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, when “1” is subtracted, B register value = “0”, C register value = “255” (decimal number ). Alternatively, for example, when B register value = “0” and C register value = “1”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0” and C register value = “0”.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT).
In the interrupt counter value acquisition in step S35, the interrupt counter value is stored in the A register. Here, in the present embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits in two addresses of “F02B” and “F02C”, but in step S41, the value stored in the lower eight bits of address “F02C” Is stored in the A register.

Next, in step S36, it is determined whether the interrupt counter value (the lower 8 bits stored in the address "F02C") has changed. Specifically, a process of subtracting "the interrupt counter value stored in address" F02C "" from "A register value" is executed, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1") , "No". When it is determined that the change has occurred, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the change has not occurred, the processing of step S36 is continued.
The zero flag is a flag for determining whether the operation result is “0” or not, and indicates a specific bit of a flag register (F register) provided in the MPU. When the specific bit is “0” (zero flag = “0”), it indicates that the operation result is not “0”, and when the specific bit is “1” (zero flag = “1”), the operation result is “0” To indicate that

  Further, as described above, when using an 8-bit value as the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value is stored only in the address "F02B", so the value of the address "F02B" is stored in the A register in step S35. In step S36, it is determined whether the value stored in the address "F02B" has changed.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the addition processing (MS_MEDAL_INC) of one medal in step S144 of FIG.
Although the addition processing of one medal in FIG. 48 is described as a subroutine in the automatic bet processing at the time of replay winning in the present embodiment, it is not limited to the automatic bet at replay, but also at the time of maintenance bet for medals, This process is commonly used when storing bets based on the operation of the bet switch 40. As described above, even when the bet process to be executed is different, the program capacity can be reduced by using the common process (program).

First, in step S171, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal. In the next step S172, processing ("+1") is performed to add "1" to the bet medal number read. Then, the calculation result is stored in the C register. For example, when the number of bet medals until then is "0", by adding "1",
C register value = 00000001 B
It becomes.

The processing here reads the value of the medal bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) stored in the RWM 61 (step S171), stores the read bet medal number data in a predetermined register (for example, the A register) Is a process of adding “1” to A and storing (updating) the A register value after the addition in the medal bet amount data.
For example, when the bet medal number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) read is “0”,
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 0
A register value = 00000000 B
A register value = 00000001 B (after adding "1")
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 1
It becomes.

In the next step S175, the main control board 60 clears the display of the acquired number display LED 72. In the present embodiment, the data of the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.
In this process, calculation is performed so that the value of A register becomes “0” (for example, calculation of exclusive OR of A register value and A register value), and the calculated A register value is stored in acquired sheet number data Execute (update) processing.
The process of actually displaying the acquired number display LED 72 is performed in the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.
Further, as described above, the one medal addition process of FIG. 51 is executed at any of automatic bet processing at the time of replay winning, maintenance bet of medals, and storage bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40. At the time of execution of these processes, the acquired number data is cleared, and the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is updated.

Next, in step S176, the main control board 60 generates lighting data of the input display LEDs 73e to 73g. The process of actually turning on the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is performed in the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process described later, as described above.
Here, the input display LED lighting data is generated for each sheet. Therefore, when the insertion number is “3”, the process is performed three times.
First, when the process proceeds to step S176, data when one sheet is inserted is generated as the inserted sheet number display LED data, and the process proceeds to the next step S177, and the main control board 60 completes generation of lighting data for the inserted sheet number Decide whether or not. If it is determined that all the data for the number of inserted sheets has not been generated, the process proceeds to step S176, and the generated number-of-inputs display LED data is generated again. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S177 that generation of lighting data for the number of inserted sheets is completed (for example, when three sheets of input display LED lighting data for three sheets are generated), the process proceeds to step S178.

In step S178, the main control board 60 performs control to store the lighting data of the number-of-inputs display LED in RWM 61 (input number-of-displays LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED)).
Actual lighting control using the number-of-inputs display LED signal data is executed in an interrupt process described later.

After step S178, the process proceeds to step S179, where the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number.
Here, the medal limit number means the maximum value of the number of medals which can be bet in the game (or the number of medals which must be bet in the game). Specifically, when the maximum number of medals that can be bet is different for each RT, it means the maximum number of medals that can be bet at that RT. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is set to play a game by betting three medals regardless of which RT. Thus, the medal limit number of the present embodiment is three. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the medal limit number is set to 3 during normal (other than 1BB game), and the medal limit number is set to 2 during 1BB game (that is, 2 bets for 1BB game) It is also possible to do

  Next, proceeding to step S180, the main control board 60 performs read processing of the betted medal (identical to step S171). Then, in the next step S181, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number is the limit number. Specifically, by subtracting the bet number from the medal limit number, if it is "0", it is determined that the bet number is the limit number. If it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process of this flowchart is ended, and if it is determined that the bet number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S182. In step S182, a medal limit flag is set. Here, processing is performed to set the D7 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “1”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pressing order designation number setting process in step S53 in FIG.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a main gaming state check table, in which (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the main gaming state check table, and (B) is each of the main gaming state check table. It is a figure which shows the relationship between data and an address.
In step S211 of FIG. 52, information on the main gaming state is acquired. This processing is processing for storing data stored in the main gaming state (_NB_GAM_STS) of the RWM 61 in the A register.
Next, at step S212, the main gaming state check table (TBL_STS_CHK) is set.

Here, as described above, the main gaming state of the present embodiment includes eight types of main gaming states 0 to 7. And, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), data indicating whether or not the pushing order instructing state is associated with each main gaming state. In FIG. 53 (A), “0 (H)” indicates that the push order instruction state is not set, and “FF (H)” indicates that the push order instruction state is set.
Furthermore, in the storage area of the ROM 62, the main gaming state check table is stored at the addresses "1ECD" to "1ED4". The start address is “1 ECD”, and the data “0 (H)” stored in the “1 ECD” indicates data of the main gaming state 0 (presence or absence of a pushing order instruction).

Description is returned to FIG.
The "set of main gaming state check table" in step S212 is to store the top address of the main gaming state check table (TBL_STS_CHK) in the HL register. That is,
HL register value = 1 ECD
It becomes.
In the next step S213, designated address data is set. This process is a process of setting the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value as the HL register value, and storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. That is, processing is performed to add the top address value of the main gaming state check table and the value of the main gaming state, and to set data at an address corresponding to the value after the addition. In other words, with the data stored in the main gaming state (_NB_GAM_STS) as the offset value, the corresponding data is acquired from the top address of the main gaming state check table.

For example, when the A register value is "1",
HL register value = 1 ECD (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1 ECE (after addition)
A register value = 0
It becomes.
Also, when the A register value = “2”,
HL register value = 1 ECD (before addition)
A register value = 2
HL register value = 1 ECF (after addition)
A register value = FF (H)
It becomes.
As described above, by performing calculation processing using data stored in the main gaming state (_NB_GAM_STS) as an offset value, it is easy to determine whether the current main gaming state is the push order instruction state or not. Can be calculated.

In the next step S214, it is determined whether or not an instruction state is made. Here, when the A register value is “0”, it is determined that the instruction state is not (No). On the other hand, when the A register value is "FF (H)", it is judged as "Yes" (in the instruction state) because it is "≠ 0".
If it is determined that it is not in the instructed state, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and if it is determined that it is in the instructed state, the process proceeds to step S215.
Therefore, when it is not in the instruction state, that is, during non-AT, it is determined as "No" in step S214, and therefore step S218 and step S220 described later are not executed. That is, the push order instruction number of the address “F0B8” is “0”, and the acquired number data (push order instruction data) of the address “F00E” is “0”.

In step S215, the winning number is set. Here, the winning number indicates the condition device number that has been won in the game. The condition device number won in the game (winning and replay) is stored in the "winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR)" at the address "F039" of the RWM 61. Then, in step S215, the value of this address is stored in the A register.
Next, at step S216, a push order instruction number table is set. This process is a process of storing the top address of the ROM 62 in which the push order designation number table (TBL_NAV_CTL; FIG. 34) is stored in the HL register. By this,
HL register value = 1 EDC (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S217, designated address data is set. This process is a process of setting a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value as the HL register value, and storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. In other words, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is acquired from the top address of the push order designation number table.
For example, when the A register value is "1",
HL register value = 1 EDC (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1 EDD (after addition)
A register value = 0 (data value stored at address "1EDD")
That is, the A register value at this time indicates a push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number.
Next, proceeding to step S218, the push order instruction number is stored in the RWM 61. That is, the value stored in the A register is stored in the push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address "F0B8" of the RWM 61.
As described above, the push sequence number corresponding to the condition device number can be easily calculated and stored in the RWM 61 by performing arithmetic processing using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value. Can.

In the next step S219, it is determined whether or not there is no push order instruction in the game. This processing determines whether the value stored in the A register is “0”, and when “0”, determines that the push order instruction is not given (Yes), and when not “0”, It is determined that there is a push order instruction (No).
If it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the display of the push order instruction information is not performed, so the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S220.

In step S220, push order instruction data is generated. This process is a process of adding "100 (decimal number)" to the value stored in the A register, and storing the value after the addition in the A register. For example, when the A register value before addition is “2”,
A register value = 2: before addition A register value = 102 (decimal number): after addition.
As described above, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by adding “100 (decimal number)” to the push order instruction number is referred to as “push order instruction data” to distinguish it from the push order instruction number. Furthermore, as described later, when push order instruction data is displayed by the acquisition number display LED 72, for example, when the push order instruction number is "2" and the push order instruction data is "102 (decimal number)", “= 2” (push order instruction information) is displayed.
The same applies to other push order numbers. For example, when the pushing order instruction number is “N”, the pushing order instruction data is “100 + N (decimal number)”, and the pushing order instruction information (display content) is “= N”.

In the next step S221, the value stored in the A register is stored in the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F00E" in the RWM 61. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals obtained in the game is “9” when the pushing order is correct when the pushing order is won. Therefore, when the value stored in the acquired sheet number data (_NB_PAYOUT) is less than "100 (decimal number)", it indicates the acquired sheet number data, and when it is "100" or more, it is determined that it is the pressing order instruction data. It is possible to

Thus, when push order instruction information is stored in the acquired sheet number data at the timing of step S53 of FIG. 41, this data is acquired at step S636 in “LED display control (FIG. 65)” of the interrupt processing described later. , And is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 as push order instruction information.
The displayed pressing order instruction information is cleared at the timing of step S65 in FIG. Furthermore, at the end of the game, when the number acquired by the player is stored in the acquired number data (step S72), the acquired number is “LED display control (FIG. 65)”. Is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing effect group number setting processing in step S54 of FIG.
First, in step S231, the condition device number won in the game is acquired. The condition device number won in the game (winning and replay) is stored in the "winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR)" at the address "F039" of the RWM 61. Then, in step S215, the value of this address is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S232, the effect group number table is set. This process is a process of storing the top address of the ROM 62 in which the effect group number table (TBL_ACT_GRP; FIG. 36) is stored in the HL register. By this,
HL register value = 1E53 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S233, designated address data is set. This process is a process of setting a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value as the HL register value, and storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
For example, when the A register value is "1",
HL register value = 1E53 (before addition)
A register value = 1
HL register value = 1E54 (after addition)
A register value = 1 (data value stored at address "1E54")
That is, the A register value at this time indicates the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number.
Next, proceeding to step S234, the effect group number is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the A register in the effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address “F0B7” of the RWM 61. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
In other words, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as an offset value, and the corresponding data is acquired from the top address of the effect group number table.
As described above, the effect group number corresponding to the condition device number can be easily calculated and stored in the RWM 61 by performing arithmetic processing using data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value. Can.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the symbol stop signal setting process in step S56 of FIG.
Here, prior to the description of FIG. 55, the symbol stop signal tables 1 and 2 will be described.
56 shows symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_IF2_SET1), where (A) shows the contents of symbol stop signal table 1, and (B) shows each data of symbol stop signal table 1 and an address It is a figure which shows a relation.
FIG. 57 shows symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_IF2_SET2), where (A) shows the contents of symbol stop signal table 2 and (B) shows each data of symbol stop signal table 2 and an address. And the relationship between

  As shown in FIG. 56 (A), ten symbol stop signal data are stored in the symbol stop signal table 1. Further, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data. For example, "small aim" is provided as one symbol stop signal, and the symbol stop signal data of "small aim" consists of four "0, 3, 12, 8".

These four data are, from the left side, the push order instruction number, the optimum operation timing of the left reel 31 (middle), the optimum operation timing of the middle reel 31 (middle), and the optimum operation timing of the right reel 31 (middle). Is shown.
For example, in "small part aim",
“0”: indicates a push order instruction number. “0” indicates that the pressing order is not required (don't care).
"3": The optimum operating position of the stop switch 42 of the left reel 31 means operating the left stop switch 42 (immediately before passing through the middle stage) so that the third symbol stops at the middle stage.
"12": The optimum operating position of the stop switch 42 of the middle reel 31 means that the middle stop switch 42 is operated so that the No. 12 symbol stops in the middle.
“8”: The optimum operating position of the stop switch 42 on the right reel 31 means that the right stop switch 42 is operated so that the symbol No. 8 stops in the middle.
Further, in FIG. 56, “127” indicating the operation timing at the push order instruction numbers “1” to “9” means that the operation timing is unimportant (arbitrary operation position).

In FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing at which the third "Replay A" stops in the middle when the left reel 31 stops, the fifth "Cherry" and the sixth "watermelon A" become effective. It can be stopped at the line.
Further, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing that the 12th "watermelon A" stops at the middle step when the middle reel 31 stops, the 12th "watermelon A" can be stopped at the effective line.
Furthermore, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing at which the eighth "red 7" stops in the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped, the ninth "watermelon A" can be stopped at the effective line.
From the above, when each stop switch 42 is operated at the above-mentioned position, it is possible to drop a small part, that is, weak cherries and strong cherries of condition device numbers “15” and “16”, condition device numbers “48” and At the time of winning the "49" weak watermelon and strong watermelon, it is possible to win without losing the winning combination.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), one symbol stop signal data is stored in the symbol stop signal table 2. Furthermore, this symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data as described above. The symbol stop signal provided in the symbol stop signal table 2 is a symbol stop signal that enables winning of the item condition device, that is, 1BB, and is data of pushing order and operation timing for aligning "BAR". .

Therefore, the push order data of this symbol stop signal is "0", and the data of the operation timing of each reel 31 is "19, 18, 17", and "black BAR" stops at the effective line. It shows the operation timing.
Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the start address in the ROM 62 of the symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_IF2_SET2) is set to "2C88", and the above symbol stops at "2C88" to "2C8B". Signal data is stored.
The symbol stop signal table 2 shown in FIG. 57 is used in a game in which the 1BB can be won, such as when the single BB is won or when the condition device in the inside of the 1BB is not elected. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which 1BB and a small winning combination or replay are won twice and a small winning combination or replay is won, a small winning aim of symbol stop signal table 1 is used (in a game in which a replay is winning, it is a small winning aim). Even in “PB = 1”, the replay is won).

  As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal including the pressing order instruction number of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of each reel 31, and is a test signal to be transmitted to the testing machine. On the test machine side, when this symbol stop signal (test signal) is received, a simulation for operating the stop switch 42 is executed in accordance with the symbol stop signal. Then, when a simulation for operating the stop switch 42 is executed according to the symbol stop signal, it is judged (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 is stopped at the correct position, and whether or not the payout rate is within the appropriate range. Judgment (confirmation) is possible.

Referring back to FIG. 55, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF2_SET) will be described.
First, at step S241, the symbol stop signal table 1 shown in FIG. 56 is set. This process is a process of storing the leading address of the symbol stop signal table 1 in the HL register. That is,
HL register value = 2C60 (H)
It becomes.
In the next step S 242, it is determined whether or not there is a push order instruction. In this processing, data of the push order indication number (_NB_ORD_INF) stored at the address “F0B8” of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register. If the A register value is not "0", it is judged as "Yes" (with push order instruction), and when it is "0", it is judged as "No" (without push order instruction).
If it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S246. If it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S243, it is determined whether the (winning and replay) condition device number is “0”. In this processing, the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored at the address "F039" of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether the A register value is not "0". If it is determined that the condition device is not "0" (i.e., the condition device for the game is not non-winning), the process proceeds to step S248. If it is determined that the condition device is "0", the process proceeds to step S244.

In step S244, it is determined whether 1BB is in operation. This processing stores the item condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) stored at the address "F040" of the RWM 61 in the A register, and determines whether the A register value is "0". When it is judged that it is "0", it is at the time of 1BB non-operation, and when it is judged that it is not "0", it is at the time of 1BB operation.
If it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S248. If it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S245.

In step S245, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set. This process is a process of setting the symbol stop signal table 2 in place of the symbol stop signal table 1 initially set in step S241. Specifically, the data stored in the A register is decremented by "1". When the process proceeds to step S245, since the A register value is "1" at that time, the A register value becomes "0" by this decrement.
Furthermore, the top address of the symbol stop signal table 2 is set in the HL register. By this,
HL register value = 2C88 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S246, an offset value is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Add the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the A register value, and store the data after the addition in the A register. That is, the data value of the A register is doubled.
(2) Add the data stored in the A register value and the data stored in the A register, and store the data after the addition in the A register. That is, the data value of the A register is doubled.
The data value stored in the A register is quadrupled by the above processes (1) and (2). For example, when the data in the A register before the above operation is “1”, it becomes “4” after the operation.

Next, at step S247, address data is acquired. This process is a process of adding the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register.
For example, when “2C60” is first stored in the HL register and “1” is stored in the A register, the operations of steps S246 and S247 produce
A register value = 4
HL register value = 2C64
It becomes.
That is, since the A register value before the operation of step S246 is "1" (pushing order instruction number 1), the head address (2C64) of pushing order instruction number 1 of the symbol stop signal data by the operation of steps S246 and S247. Can be specified.

In the next step S248, the serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the processing of storing the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip incorporated in the main CPU 63 is performed in the DE register. In the present embodiment, the address of the transmission register is “FE 53”.
Next, proceeding to step S249, processing for transmitting (outputting) the push order instruction number is executed (the push order instruction number is written to the address of the transmission register). Here, the process is to store the data stored in the HL register in the A register, and store the data stored in the A register in the address indicated by the DE register. As described above, the HL register value is also the top address of the symbol stop signal data to be transmitted even at this time.

Next, in step S250, processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the first reel 31 (in the present embodiment, the left reel 31) is executed (the designated position of the left reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register ). This process is a process of storing a value obtained by adding “1” to a value indicated by the HL register in the A register, and storing data stored in the A register in the address indicated by the DE register.
Next, proceeding to step S251, processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the second reel 31 (in this embodiment, the middle reel 31) is executed (the designated position of the middle reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register ). This process is a process of storing a value obtained by adding “2” to the value indicated by the HL register in the A register, and storing the data stored in the A register in the address indicated by the DE register.

Next, proceeding to step S252, processing for transmitting (outputting) the designated position of the third reel 31 (the right reel 31 in the present embodiment) is executed (the designated position of the right reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register). ). This process is a process of storing a value obtained by adding “3” to the value indicated by the HL register in the A register, and storing the data stored in the A register in the address indicated by the DE register.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
For example, when the symbol stop signal corresponding to "small aim" in FIG. 56 is transmitted, "00H" is transmitted in step S249, "03H" is transmitted in step S250, and "step S251". 0CH is transmitted, and "08H" is transmitted in step S252.

In addition, since the process of FIG. 55 is a process of step S56 in FIG. 41 which is main processing, it is performed every game. Then, when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are electrically connected, a symbol stop signal is transmitted every game by the processing of FIG.
On the other hand, when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, for example, even when the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall, the process of step S56 in FIG. From this, the process of FIG. 55 is executed. However, since the slot machine 10 and the tester are not connected, the symbol stop signal is not transmitted to the outside.

  Note that, as shown in steps S603 and S619 of FIG. 64 described later, in the present embodiment, detection of power-off is executed at the time of interrupt processing. For this reason, in the symbol stop signal setting process which is executed while the interruption is prohibited, power interruption does not occur during that time. In other words, even when the power is shut off during the symbol stop signal setting process (the power shutoff detection signal is input (D0 bit of the input port 2 is "1"). The symbol stop signal setting process is executed until the end.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation processing (M_REEL_READY) in step S60 in FIG.
In step S531, it is determined whether the minimum game period has elapsed. In this embodiment, about 4.1 seconds is set as the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the start of the rotation of the reel 31 in the next game). Here, the value of the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) stored in the address “F03A” of RWM 61 is read, stored in the A register, and the value stored in the A register is not “0” (zero flag is “1” Determine whether or not If it is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is judged as "No".

  If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S532, and the minimum game time is stored. This processing is processing for storing “1836” (1836 × 2.235 ms = about 4100 ms) in the minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the RWM 61. When the minimum game interval is stored in the RWM 61 in this step S532, “1” is subtracted from the next interrupt processing in step S605 described later. When the “1836” interrupt is executed from the time of step S532 and the value of the minimum time becomes “0”, it remains “0” thereafter. Then, "1836" is stored again in step S532 of the next game.

In the next step S533, the condition device number is acquired. This process is a process of storing information of the product condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address "F049" in the H register, and storing information of the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F048" in the L register. is there.
In the condition device information output bit set in the next step S534, the D7 bit of the H register is set to "1", and the D6 bit of the L register is set to "1".
In the present embodiment, when the D7 bit is “1” in the upper 2 bits of the condition device information, it indicates that it is a character object condition device information, and when the D6 bit is “1”, winning and replay are performed. The condition device information is set to point (see FIG. 16).

Next, proceeding to step S535, processing for saving the conditional device information is performed. In this processing, the H register value is stored in the product condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) of the address "F04D", and the L register value is stored in the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) of the address "F04C". is there.
Next, proceeding to step S536, the condition device information output time is stored. This process is a process of storing "25" in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) of the address "F030" of the RWM 61. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the character item condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) and the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) are externally output during “24 × 2.235 ms = 53.64 ms”. The condition device output time set here is subtracted by “1” at step S 605 described later from the next interrupt processing.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the medal payout number updating process in step S68 of FIG.
First, in step S591, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination in step S66 of FIG. 41, the medal payout number corresponding to the combination of the symbols is read from the data table or the like.

  In the next step S592, the medal payout number data is stored. This processing is processing for storing (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S591 in "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06C" in the RWM 61. Since the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is “0” at the time of processing in step S592, processing of newly writing data is executed. For example, at the time of winning one winning combination, the data value is updated from "0" to "1". It should be noted that when the combination having the medal payout is not won, it is optional whether or not the process of step S591 is performed. For example, there are a method of skipping step S591 and a method of executing the process of step S591 and writing a data value "0".

In the next step S593, the medal payout number data buffer is stored. This processing is processing for storing (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S591 in "_BF_PAY_MEDAL" of the address "F06D" in the RWM 61. Since the value of "_BF_PAY_MEDAL" is the value written in the previous game, the medal payout number in the game ("0" when there is no medal payout) is written (overwritten).
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  In the medal payout number updating process of FIG. 59, the value of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S592 is thereafter decremented by “1” each time one medal payout is made, and is set to “0” when the medal payout ends. Become. On the other hand, the value of "_BF_PAY_MEDAL" stored in step S593 is maintained (unchanged) until the processing of step S593 is performed in the next game, that is, in the next game.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S72 of FIG.
First, in step S451, an output request at the time of medal payout start is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the number of obtained (payout) sheets in a predetermined register. In the next step S452, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the RWM 61 command buffer.
Next, at step S453, a medal number setting process is executed. This process is divided into the following two. As the first process, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the D register. As the second, the value of the medal bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the E register. In the next step S454, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process of determining on / off of each bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION).

Next, in step S455, it is determined whether 1BB is in operation. In the present embodiment, the 1BB operation state flag is determined depending on whether the D3 bit of the operation state flag is “1”. If it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S456. If it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S460.
In step S456, data on the obtainable number of sheets during 1BB operation (during 1BB game) is acquired. This process is a process of storing data of the obtainable number of sheets (_CT_BIG_PAY) at the time of 1BB operation of the RWM 61 in the A register. Then, in the next step S 457, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation has reached the upper limit value. Here, the information stored in register A (the medal payout data) is subtracted from the value stored in register A, the calculation result is stored in register A, and the value stored in register A is not negative (carry flag ≠ “1 ") Determine whether or not. If it is determined that it is not negative, it is determined as "No."
If it is determined to be negative, the process proceeds to step S458, and if it is determined not to be negative, the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S458, the number of obtainable sheets at the time of 1BB operation is cleared. This process is a process of performing an "XOR" operation on the A register value and the A register value, and storing the operation result in the A register. Due to this arithmetic processing, the A register value is always "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S459.
In step S459, the obtainable number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation is updated. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the obtainable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) of the RWM 61 during 1BB operation. Then, the process proceeds to step S460.

In step S460, a set process of medal payout number is performed. This process is a process of storing the E register value (in the process of step S453, the E register value is the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL)) in the A register. As a result, the value of the medal bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register.
In the next step S461, it is determined whether or not replay is displayed. This process is a process of determining whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is "1". When it is determined that the replay display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S467. When it is determined that the replay display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S462.

In step S462, a set process of medal payout number is performed. This process is a process of storing the D register value (in the process of step S453, the D register value is the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL)) in the A register. Thus, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to step S467.
As a result of the above processing, the A register value becomes the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) value set in step S453 at the time of replay winning, and the A register value is The medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) value set in step S462 is obtained.

Next, proceeding to step S467, it is determined whether or not there is a payout of medals. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. In this process, although the zero check may be performed by reading the value of the address "F06C" of the RWM 61, the medal payout number data is stored in the D register in step S453 at the time of step S467. It is also possible to read the D register value and perform a zero check. Then, when it is determined that it is "0", that is, when it is determined that there is no payout of medals, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", that is, when it is determined that there is a payout of medals, the process proceeds to step S468.
In step S468, the number of stored sheets is read. Next, in step S469, it is determined whether the number of stored medals has reached a limit value. If the stored number is "50", it is determined that the stored number is at the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S473. If it is determined that the stored number is not at the limit, the process proceeds to step S470.

  In step S470, the standby time at the time of accumulated medal addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” of the number of interrupts (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set. Therefore, "00000000B" is set as the B register value, and "00101110B" is set as the C register value. Next, proceeding to step S146, a 2-byte wait process (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT) is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0". When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S471 is completed, the process proceeds to step S472, and the one-sheet adding process of the stored number is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S474.

  When the process proceeds from step S469 to step S473, one medal payout process (process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35a to the player) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored sheets is added until the number of stored sheets reaches the limit value, and when the number of stored sheets is the limit, a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper is executed.

In step S 474, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is set to “+1”. This process is a process of updating the acquired number data at the address "F00E" by "+1". For example, when the display until then is “2”, this corresponds to the processing of updating the display to “3”.
In the next step S475, a process of subtracting "1" from the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is performed. In step S475, only the medal payout number data of the address "F06C" is updated, and the value of the medal payout number data buffer of the address "F06D" is not updated.
Next, in step S476, it is determined whether medal payout has been completed. In this process, it is determined whether the updated medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) has become "0". If it is determined that the medal payout number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S477. If it is determined that the medal payout number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S468.

  In step S477, an output request at the time of medal payout end is set. This process is a process of storing in the register a command indicating the end of medal payout. In the next step S478, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the RWM 61 command buffer. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above-described payout process, when a payout for adding one stored sheet number is performed, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S471 and S472. As a result, the player can be shown to count up the stored number display LED 71. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED 71 before storage addition is “08”, and eight medals are stored and added to this, “display“ 08 ”→ weight process of 100 ms → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Weight processing of ... → → 100 ms weight processing → display "16". On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when the number of stored sheets is one, the display "08" is instantly changed to the display "16".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of stored sheets, a two-byte time waiting process is performed for each addition so that a payout sound ("Plurl ...) output from the sub control board 80 side. Can be synchronized with the count-up of the stored number.

On the other hand, when the number of stored sheets exceeds the maximum number “50” and the medals are actually paid out in the processes after step S473, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S470 and S471 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay it out, as described above, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one sheet. As a result, since the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, when an actual medal is paid out, a 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when the medals are actually paid out, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub control board 80 side without providing the 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S73 of FIG.
In step S541, processing is performed to clear the flag of the condition device. This processing is processing for clearing other than the special combination condition device, and when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, processing is also performed to clear the special combination condition device. In the next step S 542, the process of turning off the replay display LED is performed. This processing corresponds to processing for setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to "0". Next, in step S543, the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) to “0”.

In the next step S544, 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL; FIG. 62) is performed. This process, which will be described later, is a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied during the 1BB game. In the next step S545, it is determined whether or not RB is in operation. This processing determines whether the RB operation status flag which is the D4 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is "0" and determines that it is not "0" (zero flag ≠ 1) (at the time of RB operation) When it is determined that there is an RB operation management (M_RB_CTL; FIG. 63) is performed, and when it is determined that it is “0” (not during RB operation), the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
In FIG. 41, the 2-byte time wait process at the time of displaying a special combination is performed in steps S70 and S71, but it is not limited to this and can be performed before step S541 in the game end check process. .

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing 1BB operation management (M_BB_CTL) in step S544 in FIG.
In step S551, the operation state flag is checked. This process executes a process of storing the value of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is rotationally shifted to the right (one digit). Specifically, for example, at the time of replay operation, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is
A register value = 00000001 B
It becomes.
Furthermore, if you rotate one digit to the right,
A register value = 00000000 B (carry flag on)
It becomes.

Also, for example, at the time of 1BB operation (and at the time of RB operation), the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is
A register value = 00011000 B
It becomes.
Furthermore, if you rotate one digit to the right,
A register value = 00001100 B (zero flag off (≠ '1'))
It becomes.
In the next step S552, it is determined whether or not 1BB is in operation. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the zero flag after the rotation is “0”, and when the zero flag is “0”, it is determined as “No” (not during 1BB operation).

If it is determined in step S552 that 1BB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S553. If it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S553, the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value of the obtainable number (_CT_BIG_PAY) at the time of 1BB operation stored in RWM 61 (addresses "F060" and "F061") in the A register.

  In the next step S554, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied (whether or not the obtainable number of sheets becomes “0”). This process is performed by determining whether the value stored in the A register is “0” (whether the zero flag is not “0”). If it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S555, and if it is determined that the 1BB operation end condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  In step S555, the A register value is stored in the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION). Since the A register value is “0” when the process proceeds to step S555, the updated operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is “00000000B”. Next, at step S556, an output request at the end of the 1BB operation is set. In the present embodiment, “3F01” is stored in the DE register. Then, in the next step S557, the control command set 1 is executed, and the processing of this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing RB operation management (M_RB_CTL) in step S546 of FIG.
In step S 561, “1” is subtracted from the number of games (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) at the time of RB operation stored in the RWM 61 (address “F 073”). In the next step S562, it is determined whether or not the number of games played during the RB operation after the update in step S561 is "0" (whether the zero flag = "1"). If it is determined that the number of games at the time of RB operation is "0", the process proceeds to step S566, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S563.

  In step S563, it is determined whether the value of the medal payout number data buffer ("_BF_PAY_MEDAL" at the address "F06D") is "0". This determination is a process for determining whether or not to reduce the value of the number of winnings at the time of RB operation, and determines whether or not there is a payout due to the winning combination of the small winning combination in the game. That is, when the small winning combination is won in the game (when there is a medal payout), the medal payout number is stored in "_BF_PAY_MEDAL" in step S593 of FIG. 59 (the medal payout number update process) described above. By determining whether or not the data value is "0", it is determined whether or not there is a payout due to the winning combination of the small winning combination in the game.

  With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the small winning combination has won without requiring a special (dedicated) process to determine whether or not the small winning combination has won during RB operation. . That is, when the small winning combination is won, the processing of "reserve the number of payouts" is performed based on the winning, so the number of payouts is read, and if the number of payouts is a specific value ("0" in this embodiment), the small winning combination is It can be determined that the small winning combination has not been won, and if it is a value other than the specific value (a value other than “0” in the present embodiment), it can be determined that the small winning combination is won.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, when there is a payout of medals in the game (when a small winning combination is made), the number is stored in the above-described medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL), but the medal payout number data is stored. The number of payouts of the game is also stored in the buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Then, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is subtracted as the medal payout is performed, and becomes "0" when the medal payout is finished. On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated (subtracted) by the payout process. For this reason, the determination as to whether or not there is a payout due to the winning of the small combination in the game refers to the value of the medal payout number data buffer.

When it is determined in step S563 that the value of the medal payout number data buffer is "0" (in the small winning combination non-winning case), the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and it is determined that the value is not "0". (When a minor winning combination), the process proceeds to step S564.
In step S 564, “1” is subtracted from the number of winnings (_CT_BONUS_WIN) during RB operation stored in RWM 61 (address “F074”). Next, proceeding to step S565, it is determined whether the operation of the RB has ended. In step S565, as a result of subtracting "1" from the number of wins in step S564, it is determined whether the value is "0" (zero flag = "1"). If it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S566, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S566, the operation state flag of the RB is set to "0". This process is a process of updating the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) to “0”.
Next, at step S567, the standby time at the end of the RB operation is set. This process is a process of setting a value corresponding to the waiting time to the BC register, and in the present embodiment, "5" (about 11 ms) is set to the BC register. More specifically, B register value = “0” (00000000 B) and C register value = “5” (00000101 B) are set. Then, in the next step 5680, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. After waiting processing for 2 bytes, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  When the operation state flag (D4 bit of _FL_ACTION) corresponding to RB is cleared (set to “0”) in step S566, after 2-byte time waiting processing is performed, the process returns to step S74 in FIG. And if it progresses to step S40 again, it will progress to the game start set process of step S42. In the game start set process, the D4 bit (RB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is set to "1" by updating the operation state flag in step S88 of FIG. Thereby, the operation status flag of RB becomes "0" when the number of games or the number of wins during RB operation becomes "2" and the termination condition of RB operation is satisfied, but the termination condition of 1BB game is not satisfied. When (when the D3 bit (1BB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is “1”), it will be set to “1” again after the “5” interrupt has elapsed. By providing such a process, even if the operation state flag corresponding to RB is cleared in step S566, the operation state flag corresponding to RB can be immediately turned on during the continuation of the 1BB game. Here, the reason why the operation state flag of RB is once set to “0” will be described later.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 60 (main CPU 63). As described above, the main control board 60 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 64 in a cycle of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, save processing of the register value and prohibition process of the overlap interrupt are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 63 used in the main processing is used in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 61. Furthermore, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is done because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be issued while the power-off process is being performed.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not a power off has been detected. Here, when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value by the voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) provided on main control board 60 (not shown), power is supplied to bit D0 of input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
When it is detected that the power is turned off, the process proceeds to the power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) of step S619, and when it is determined that the power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S605, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, subtraction processing of the minimum gaming time (_TM2_GAME) set in step S532, subtraction processing of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) set in step S536, and further, minimum gaming time (4 in processing of step S531) It may be mentioned whether or not .1 second has passed.
Next, in step S606, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 65) is performed. Here, in accordance with the state of the slot machine 10, the setting value, the number of stored sheets, the number of acquired sheets, the error display contents (error code) and the like are lighted using the 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5).

  As described above, in the non-returnable error shown in FIG. 41 and the like, an error display is output by the main processing, but the display of the setting value during setting change or setting confirmation, the number of stored sheets, the number of acquired sheets, and the returnable errors is This LED display control is performed every time interrupt processing is performed.

  Next, in step S607, the input port 0 to 2 is read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input ports 0 to 2 (level data, rising) Data, falling data) are generated and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61. In the next step S608, the built-in random number is checked. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is turned on.

  Specifically, for example, when a clock frequency abnormality (for example, when the update of the random number is late) of the random number for the role lottery is detected, the error flag is turned on. More specifically, SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied, the error flag is turned on.

  Then, in step S609, it is determined whether or not an error occurs in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that an error does not occur, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S620 to shift to an unreturnable error process. The error display content at this time is "E7".

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed on a reel 31 basis (left, middle, right), and may be stopped, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operation state. When drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, an input error check process is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S613, transmission of a control command (I_CMD_OUT; FIG. 67) is performed. This process is, for example, a process of transmitting the control command (unsent control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 61) set in the output request set and the control command set 1 to the sub control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer in the output request set and control command set 1, interrupt processing after that point (when the command buffer is empty, in principle, it comes after that point) In step S613, the control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

  In the next step S614, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 61 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S615, data is written (set) in the output port 5 to output an external signal (transmit a signal to the external concentrated terminal plate 100).

In the next step S616, output processing (FIG. 69) of the test signal and the conditional device information is performed. This process is a test when determining whether the slot machine 10 is properly designed in accordance with the law by writing (setting) the data to the output ports 9 and 10 based on the data stored in the RWM 61. It is a process of sending a test signal to the machine.
Next, in step S617, random number update processing is performed. In the next step S618, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As shown in the above processing, the on / off state of the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, the state display LEDs 73 (73a to 73g), and the setting value display LED 64 is controlled by the interrupt process every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed at the time of unrecoverable error processing.
A non-returnable error is a serious error that can not normally occur, and processing such as update of RWM 61 data based on data from input port or transmission of control command to sub control board 80 is performed based on abnormal data. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is disabled.

In other words, since the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80 at the time of non-returnable error, it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Furthermore, when an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when a non-returnable error occurs, the command is not sent to the sub control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S606 of FIG.
First, in step S621, the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off. The output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the LED digit signal, and the output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the LED segment signal. By outputting "00000000B" for these output ports 3 and 4, the output of all the LEDs is temporarily prevented. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is prevented that the different LEDs are simultaneously turned on and viewed (the display is covered) even in a moment (preventing the afterimage).

In the next step S 622, the LED display request counter (_CT_SEG_DSP) (address “F00F”) is updated. The update of the LED display request counter is a process of shifting the bit which is on, that is, "1" to the right by one digit. The updated value is stored in the address "F00F" of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether the LED display request counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether the LED display request counter updated in step S 622 is “0”. If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S624, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S625.

  In step S624, the LED display request counter is initialized. Here, the initialization of the LED display request counter is set to "00010000B" and stored in the address "F00F" of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S625. Therefore, when the LED display request counter is updated from "00000001B" to "00000000B" in step S622, it is determined to be "0" in step S623, so it is updated to "00010000B" in step S624. . That is, in one interrupt process, "00000001B" is updated to "00100000B".

In step S625, the LED display request counter and the LED display request flag are acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address "F00F" of the LED display request counter is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the HL register is stored in the E register.
(2) Add "1" to the value of the HL register, and store the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (F010) after the addition of "1" (that is, the LED display request flag) in the A register.
(3) Add "1" to the value of the HL register. By this processing, the HL register value becomes “F011” and becomes an address value indicating error display data of the RWM 61.

Next, proceeding to step S626, the segment display confirmation set of the digit to be displayed this time is performed. This process performs an AND operation on the data stored in the A register (data of the LED display request flag) and the data stored in the E register (data of the LED display request counter), and stores the calculation result in the A register . This becomes data of the LED which lights up this time.
For example,
LED display request counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display request counter value: 00010000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000 B
It becomes.

Then, the data stored in the A register is stored in the D register.
In the next step S627, it is determined whether there is a display request. In the operation of step S626, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0". If it is not "0", it is determined that display is requested (Yes). If it is "0", no display is requested (No) I will judge. If "Yes" in the step S627, the process proceeds to the step S628, and if "No", the process proceeds to the step S643.

In step S628, error display data is acquired. As described above, at this point in time, the value indicated by the HL register value is the address value (F011) indicating error display data, so the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register .
In the next step S629, the LED segment table 2 is set. The LED segment table 2 is a data table shown in FIG. 6, and the top address of the data stored in the ROM 62 is "1816 (H)" as shown in FIG. Therefore, this address value is stored in the HL register.

  Next, in step S630, setting value data is acquired. Here, the current setting value stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 61 is read and stored in the A register. Next, in step S631, it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. In this determination, it is determined whether the D4 bit (digit 5) is "1" (is "00010000B") or not as a result of the AND operation. When it is "1", that is, when it is determined that the setting value display request has been made, the process proceeds to step S642, and when it is determined that the setting value display request is not made, the process proceeds to step S632.

In step S632, the stored sheet number display data stored at the address "F00D" of the RWM 61 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S633, the upper digit offset is obtained. This process is an operation of dividing data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", storing the value of the quotient in the A register, and storing the remainder value in the C register.
In the next step S634, it is determined whether there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number. This process determines whether the D0 bit of the D register (the value obtained by ANDing the LED display request counter value and the LED display request flag value) is “1”. If “1”, the process returns “Yes” It will be judged. If it is determined that the display request for the upper digit of the stored number is requested, the process proceeds to step S642. If it is determined that the display request is not requested, the process proceeds to step S635.

In step S635, it is determined whether there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquired number. In this process, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the D register is "1". If it is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S641. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request for display of the lower digit of the acquired number, the process proceeds to step S636.
In step S636, acquired sheet number data or push order instruction data is acquired. This process is a process of storing acquired sheet data (or push order instruction data) stored at the address "F00E" in the A register. Here, in FIG. 41, the pressing order instruction data is stored in “F00E” at the timing of step S53, and the acquired sheet number data is stored at the timing of step S72.

  In the next step S637, it is determined whether or not an error is indicated. This process determines whether the B register value is "0", and when it is "0", it determines "No". If it is determined in step S637 that an error is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S639. If it is determined that an error is displayed, the process proceeds to step S638.

In step S638, the LED segment table 1 (see FIG. 6) is set. This process stores "1811 (H)" (FIG. 7), which is the start address of the LED segment table 1, in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S639, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. This process executes an operation of dividing the data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the maximum payout number in one game is “9”, there is no case where the number of medals obtained is more than “10”. However, for example, when the maximum payout number is “15”, when the operation divided by “10” is executed, the quotient becomes “1” and the remainder becomes “5”, so “1” is stored in A register. And store "5" in the C register.
Furthermore, when the order designation data is "102 (decimal number)" at the address "F00E" and the operation divided by "10" is executed, the quotient is "10 (decimal number)" and the remainder is "2". Therefore, “0AH” is stored in the A register, and “2H” is stored in the C register.

  In the next step S640, it is determined whether there is a display request for the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 72 or not. In this process, it is determined whether the D2 bit of the D register is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the display request is present. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S642. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S641.

In step S641, the offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the C register in the A register.
Next, at step S642, segment output data is acquired. This process is a process of adding the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register, and storing data of an address on the ROM 62 indicated by the data after addition in the D register.
For example,
HL register value = 1816 (H) (before addition)
A register value = 1 (H)
HL register value = 1817 (H) (after addition)
D register value = 00000110 (B): data for displaying “1”.

In addition, when the pressing order data is stored in the acquired number data of “F00E”,
HL register value = 1816 (H) (before addition)
A register value = 0 A (H)
HL register value = 1820 (H) (after addition)
D register value = 01001000 (B): Data for displaying "=".

Next, proceeding to step S643, it is determined whether there is a display request for the segment P or not. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) of the address "F012" of the RWM 61 is stored in the A register.
(2) AND operation is performed on the data stored in the A register and the data stored in the E register. If the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request. If it is determined that the segment P display request is present, the process proceeds to step S644. If it is determined that the display P is not requested, the process proceeds to step S645.

  In step S644, segment P output data is set. This process is a process of setting the D7 bit (the bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data stored in the D register to "1". Next, in step S645, LED display data is output. Specifically, the data stored in the E register is stored in the output port 3, and the data stored in the D register is stored in the output port 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one digit is lit in one interrupt process. That is, the LED to be lit is switched as digit 5 → digit 4 → ··· → digit 1 → digit 5 → ··· for each interruption (every 2.235 ms). Therefore, for example, after the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71 which is the digit 1 is lit, it is lit next after “11.175 ms” which is after 5 interrupts.

Here, the brightness of the LED is determined by how many ms time intervals it has from the lighting time to the next lighting time. In the present embodiment, one digit is controlled to light up once every “11.175 ms” as described above, but from the player's eyes, the digits 1 to 4 are substantially Because it looks like it is always lit, there is no problem at all.
On the other hand, in the case of a non-returnable error, for example, processing of repeating lighting switching of the upper digit and the lower digit every 0.128 ms is executed. Thereby, the switching cycle of the lighting LED at the time of the non-returnable error becomes earlier than the interrupt cycle, and the luminance becomes higher than the LED lighting luminance in the interrupt process.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) when the power-off is detected in FIG. 64 and the process proceeds to step S619.
First, in step S651, the outputs of all output ports are turned off. Next, proceeding to step S652, the power off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing, in the RWM 61, data indicating that a normal power-off process has been performed. Specifically, "01 (H)" is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61. Thus, when a normal power-off process is performed, "01 (H)" is stored as the power-off processed flag via step S652, but in the case of other power-off, the power-off processed flag “01 (H)” is not stored at the address as

In the next step S653, checksum data of the RWM 61 is calculated. This processing is to calculate a checksum including a work area (RWM 61) used by the program, and examples of the program use area as a target include a program work area, an unused area, a stack area and the like.
Then, in the next step S654, it is determined whether or not calculation of the entire range of checksums is completed. If it is determined that the calculation is not completed, the process returns to step S653 to continue calculation of checksums. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation of the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S655.

  In step S655, the calculated checksum is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 61. Here, the data stored in the RWM 61 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes “0” when all data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the checksum of RWM 61 ). Specifically, all data in the program use area (program work area, unused area, stack area, etc.) of the target RWM 61 is added, and the lower 8-bit value at that time is, for example, "00000001" (01H) When the check sum data is stored, the check sum data stored in the predetermined address is "11111111" (FFH).

  Then, when the checksum of the RWM 61 is to be executed at the start of the program, the checksum data is added to all the data of the program use area of the RWM 61 in the same range as the above. If the checksum data calculated by this is "0", it is judged that it is a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is judged that it is an abnormal value.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S656 to be in a reset waiting state. Here, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60, and therefore, it is in a state of waiting for the output of the reset signal. Here, in the voltage monitoring apparatus, when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined value, a power supply disconnection detection signal is input to the D0 bit of the input port 2 (FIG. 8), and thereafter, a predetermined time elapses by a circuit including a capacitor and a resistor. After that, the reset signal is configured to be input to the MPU. At this time, the capacitor and the resistance value are designed such that it is time for the process at the time of power-off to be properly executed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing control command transmission in step S613 in FIG.
First, in step S661, the control command buffer address is set. This process is a process of storing "F113 (H)" which is the head address of the control command buffer (_BF_SUBCMD) in the HL register.
In the next step S662, a read pointer value of the control command is acquired. This process is a process of storing the control command read pointer value of the address “F017” in the RWM 61 in the A register.

The "specified address set" in the next step S663 is a process of adding the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register, and storing the data after the addition in the HL register.
Furthermore, in "address setting of control command buffer to be transmitted" in step S664, the data stored in the HL register and the data stored in the A register are added in the same manner as in step S663, and after addition It is a process of storing data in the HL register.
Through the processes of steps S663 and S664, data obtained by doubling the data stored in the A register is added to the data stored in the HL register.

In the next step S665, it is determined whether or not there is a control command. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is stored in the D register.
(3) When the data stored in the E register and the data stored in the D register are “0”, it is determined that the control command is not included (No).
When it is determined that the control command is included, the process proceeds to step S666, and when it is determined that the control command is not included, the process proceeds to step S670.

At step S666, a control command is output. In this process, the data stored in the E register is output to the output port 7, and the data stored in the D register is output to the output port 8.
In the next step S667, output of output port 2 is performed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The value of the number-of-inputs display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address “F01D” is stored in the A register.
(2) The data stored in the A register is ORed with “10000000B”, and the result of the operation is stored in the A register.
(3) The data stored in the A register is output to the output port 2.
Thereby, the D7 bit (sub control data strobe signal) of the data output to the output port 2 is always "1".

In the next step S668, the transmitted command storage buffer is cleared. In this process, the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value are cleared (“0”).
Next, at step S669, the control command read pointer value is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address of the control command read pointer value (_NB_CMDREAD) of the address "F017" is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(3) It is determined whether the HL register value after addition exceeds "31" (decimal number), and if it does not exceed "31", the value is stored in the control command read pointer value. On the other hand, when "31" is exceeded, "0" is stored in the control command read pointer value.

In the next step S670, output of output port 2 is performed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The value of the number-of-inputs display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address “F01D” is stored in the A register.
(2) The data stored in the A register is output to the output port 2.
As a result, the D7 bit (sub control data strobe signal) of the data output to the output port 2 is always "0".

Therefore, at the output of step S667, the sub control data strobe signal is "1", and at the output of step S670, the sub control data strobe signal is "0".
Next, at step S671, control command clear data is output. This process is a process of outputting "00000000B" to the output ports 7 and 8. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing transmission timings of signals in the control command transmission process (I_CMD_OUT) in FIG.
When the interrupt processing is started, the second control command (sub control data signals 1 to 8) is output to the output port 7 in step S666 of the control command transmission processing, and the first control command (sub control data to the output port 8) Output the signals 9 to 16).

When transmission of the first control command and the second control command is started, a sub control data strobe signal is transmitted in step S667. Here, the time from when transmission of the first control command and the second control command is started to when transmission of the sub control data strobe signal is started (in the figure, “A”. Steps from S666 to S667) ) Is, for example, about “1.75 μS”.
Also, the time during which the sub control data strobe signal is transmitted ("B" in the figure, between steps S667 and S670) is, for example, about "4.25 μS". Further, in the figure, “C” (between steps S670 and S671) is, for example, about “1.19 μS”.
Then, after the first control command and the second control command are transmitted in the process of step S666, “00H” which is control command clear data is output to the output ports 7 and 8 by the process of step S671.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the test signal / condition device information output process in step S616 of FIG.
In step S571, the output data of the test signal is set. This process is a process of storing the information stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) in the A register. Then, in the next step S572, a test signal is output. This process is a process of outputting the information stored in the A register to the output port 10. Thereby, information based on the information stored in the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is output (sent) from the output port 10. Therefore, the signal of the operating state flag can be output to the tester as a test signal.

In the process of FIG. 69, steps S571 and S572 correspond to the process of outputting the information of the operation state flag, and the following steps S573 to S579 correspond to the process of the output of the condition device information.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the information based on the information stored in the operation state flag is output from the output port 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it does not have an operating status flag, and obtains predetermined information (each part of information is assumed to store partial information indicating the operating status) from the addresses of a plurality of RWMs 61 Alternatively, information corresponding to the operation state flag may be created (synthesized) by arithmetic processing using a register, and the information may be written (set) in the output port 10 as a test signal.

In the next step S573, clear data of the condition device information is set. This process is a process of storing information stored in the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) stored in the RWM 61 in the A register.
As described above, when it is determined in step S531 that the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed in FIG. It is memorized. Then, this value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt (specifically, at the time of the timer measurement process of step S 605 in FIG. 64). Therefore, after the value of "25" is stored, it becomes "0" after the "25" interrupt.

  In the next step S574, it is determined whether it is time to output the conditional device information. This processing determines whether the value stored in the A register is "0" (zero flag = 1), and determines "No" when it is "0", and "Yes" when it is not "0". I will judge. If it is determined that the condition device information is output, the process proceeds to step S575. If it is determined that the condition device information is not output, the process proceeds to step S579.

  In step S575, the address of the RWM 61 of the item condition device information is set. Specifically, the address of the item condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B), that is, "F04D (H)" is stored in the HL register. As a result, the H register value = "F0 (H)" and the L register value = "4D (H)". In the next step S 576, it is determined whether or not the item condition device information output is in progress. This process subtracts "12.5 (25/2)" from the value stored in the A register (the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT is stored in the A register in step S573)). When it is determined that the operation result is larger than “0” (carry flag ≠ 1), the process is determined as “Yes”. That is, it is determined whether half of the time has elapsed from the initial value “24” of the condition device output time. If it is determined that it is at the time of product condition condition apparatus information output, the process proceeds to step S578, if it is determined that it is not at the product condition condition apparatus information output, it proceeds to step S577.

  In step S577, the RWM 61 address of the winning and replay condition device information is set. This process subtracts "1" from the HL register value in order to store the address of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N), that is, "F04C (H)" in the HL register. As a result, HL register value = “F04C (H)” (H register value = “F0 (H)”, and L register value = “4C (H)”).

Next, at step S578, the conditional device information is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. Therefore, when the HL register value = “F04C (H)”, the value of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) is stored, and when the HL register value = “F04D (H)”, the item condition is The value of device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is stored.
In step S579, the information stored in the A register is output to the output port 9. As a result, the conditional device information is output (sent) from the output port 9. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the test signal / condition device information output process described above, the information of the operation state flag can be output (sent) to the tester for each interrupt process. For example, by receiving the signal on the test machine side, it is possible to determine whether the on / off state flag of the slot machine 10 is correctly executed.
In step S574, when the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is "0", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S579. In this case, since the A register value is "0", "0" (00000000 B) is output as the conditional device information.

Further, when the value of the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is not “0” (when “1” to “24”), the condition device information is output for each interrupt processing.
Although "25" is set in step S536 in FIG. 58 as the initial value of the condition device output time, the test signal / condition device information in step S616 after "1" is subtracted in step S605 in FIG. Proceed to output processing. Therefore, after “25” is set in step S536, the condition device output time value is “24” when the process first proceeds to step S574 in FIG.

  Furthermore, when the conditional device information is output, step S577 is not executed when the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “13” to “24” (also referred to as the first period) in the determination of step S576. Therefore, the condition device information to be output is the role item condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B). On the other hand, when the condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is in the range of “1” to “12” (also referred to as the second period) in the determination of step S576, the process of step S577 is performed. The device information is the winning and replay information device information (_NB_CNDINF_N).

Furthermore, when the value of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) is “0” for each interrupt processing, the value of “0” as the conditional device information and the value of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) are other than “0”. If the value is, a value other than "0" is output as the conditional device information.
Then, it is step S533 in FIG. 58 that the conditional device information is updated. Therefore, the conditional device information is updated after the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed (when "Yes" in step S531). As a result, when there is a change in the received condition device information other than “0”, the test machine receives the condition device information other than “0”, and then changes to “0” other than the next change. By measuring the time until the conditional device information is received, it can be determined whether the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) is secured. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to measure the minimum game time on the test machine side only by outputting the conditional device information without separately providing information on the minimum game time.

Next, in FIG. 69, the output of the test signal (operation state flag) in step S572 and the output of the conditional device information in step S579 will be described.
FIG. 70 shows the on / off states of D3 bit (1BB) and D4 bit (RB) in the information of the operation state flag output as the test signal in step S572.

In the example of FIG. 70, an example is shown in which 1BB is being played, the D3 bit (1BB) of the operation state flag is on, and the D4 bit (RB) is repeatedly on / off.
When the 1BB game is started, the D3 (1BB) and D4 (RB) bits of the operation status flag become "1", and the interrupt processing makes the D3 bit (1BB) and D4 bit (RB) as a test signal. Information is on ("1").

  Then, after the RB operation, if 2 games are finished and it is judged that the operation end condition of RB is satisfied (“Yes” in step S565 of FIG. 63), the operation state flag of RB is “0” in the step S566. Then, in the next steps S 567 and S 568, waiting processing is performed for the number of times of interruption “5” (about 11 ms). Thereafter, the process returns to step S74 of FIG. Then, once again, the process proceeds to the game start setting process of step S42, and the D4 bit (RB) of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is not updated if the operation condition flag update in step S88 of FIG. It is set to "1".

Thereby, in the 1BB game, when the termination condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, the operation status flag of the RB becomes “1” during the 2 games, so the test signal of the RB operation continues to be output, and after the 2 games end , And "0" during the "5" interrupt (about 11 ms) and become "1" again. As a result, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 70 is obtained.
Here, the main processing is stopped between steps S567 and S568 in FIG. That is, even when the operation switch is operated, the operation can not be accepted. For example, when a waiting process of 2 bytes for a few seconds is performed after the operating status flag of RB changes from "1" to "0", the player can not attach the operation switch, that is, the main It is thought that it is possible to feel that the process is stopped (freezed) with a sense of bodily sensation.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, if it is set during the “5” interrupt (about 11 ms), giving the player a sense of discomfort even if the main processing is stopped (the rhythm of the player playing the game is broken) ) Is considered to be almost nonexistent. If the main process is stopped for about 11 ms, it is considered that the player can hardly realize the stop of the main process.
On the other hand, if the time during which the RB operation status flag is "0" is too short, the RB operation status flag is correctly "0" when it is output as a test signal to the tester. There is a possibility that it can not be detected. In consideration of these matters, in the present embodiment, it is set during the “5” interrupt (about 11 ms).

Thus, the above time is set as a time during which the test machine can correctly detect that the operation status flag of the RB is "0" as a test signal without making the player realize that the main processing (game progression) has stopped. It was set.
In the present embodiment, the interval is set to “5” interrupts (approximately 11 ms), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the interval may be approximately “2” interrupts (approximately 4.5 ms) to “25” interrupts (approximately 56 ms) If it is, it is thought that the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an output example of the conditional device information in the step S579 of FIG.
In the example of FIG. 71, in the inside of 1BB, the “N” game (winning and replay) wins the condition device number “23” (small part A1), and the next “N + 1” game (winning and replay) The example of an output of conditional device information when winning a conditional device number "1" (Replay A) is shown. In the "N" game, 1BB is not won.
First, when inside 1BB, the D0 bit of the item condition condition apparatus information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is “1”. Therefore, the item condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) is "10000001B".
In addition, when the condition device number “23” is won in the “N” game, since the D0 to D5 bits of the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) are “010111” (= “23”), the winning is achieved. The replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) is “01010111B”.

  Then, in the "N" game, while the condition device output time value is "24" to "13", "Yes" is made in step S576 in FIG. 69, and the character condition device information set in step S575 is output. Do. Next, while the condition device output time value is “12” to “1”, “No” is obtained in step S576 of FIG. 69, and the winning and replay condition device information set in step S577 is output. Furthermore, when the condition device output time value becomes "0", the condition becomes "No" in step S574 in FIG. 69, so the condition device information ("00000000B") cleared in step S573 is output.

  Then, the next game is started, the lottery for the winning combination is performed with the “N + 1” game, and the condition device output time value is “24” to “13” when the condition device number “1” is won (winning and replay). While it is “,” “10000001B” is output as in the “N” game, and “01000001B” is output while the condition device output time value is “12” to “1”. As a result, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 71 is obtained.

  Here, from the time when the output of the item condition device information of the “N” game eye is started (when the condition device output time value is “24”), the output of the item condition device information of the “N + 1” game eye is Until the time it is started (when the condition device output time value is "24"), when the game is digested in the shortest time, it is the minimum game time, ie 4.1 seconds ("1836" interrupt) . Therefore, as described above, the test machine measures the time from when output of the item condition device information is started to when output of the item condition device information in the next game is started, If one second has elapsed, it can be determined that the slot machine 10 has secured the minimum game time.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, in FIG. 42, the command transmission table 1 is set in step S95, and the control command continuous setting process (M_CMD_LIST; FIG. 45) is executed in the next step S96.
Similarly, in FIG. 41, the command transmission table 2 is set in step S58, and control command continuous setting processing is executed in the next step S59.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, for example, when the command transmission table 1 is set, control commands continuously transmitted here are (1) operation status, (2) 1BB acquisition number (lower), (3) 1BB earned number (upper rank), (4) main gaming state, (5) precursor game number / AT game number, (6) RT state. When the command transmission table 2 is set, as shown in FIG. 44, it is (1) push order instruction number, (2) effect group number, and (3) combination condition condition device number.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a process of setting a plurality of commands consecutively is executed by a method other than the command transmission table set and the control command continuous set.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the second embodiment, in which (A) shows commands to be set continuously, and (B) and (C) show a flowchart corresponding to the second embodiment. .
As shown in FIG. 72 (A), it is assumed that there are three command of an item condition device number, an effect group number, and a push order instruction number as commands to be set continuously. That is, there are three control commands transmitted using the command transmission table 2. However, it is not limited to this.
In the second embodiment, the address of the RWM 61 of the control command to be transmitted (set) continuously is set to a sequential number. In the example of FIG. 72 (A), the data of the role condition apparatus number, the effect group number, and the push order designation number are stored in the addresses “F0B6” to “F0B8” of the RWM 61, respectively.
The first control commands of the item condition device number, effect group number, and push order instruction number data are 39 (H), 3A (H) and 3B respectively as shown in FIG. Assume that (H).

  Next, as shown in (B) in the figure, instead of the command transmission table set and the control command continuous set described above, the command output request set in step S701, the control command transmission number set in step S702, the continuation of step S703. Command set (M_CONCMDS_SET; FIG. 72 (C)) is performed.

First, in the command output request set in step S701, the following processing is executed.
(1) In the D register, the data of the first control command is stored in the control command when transmitting the item condition device number. In this example, as shown in FIG. 72 (A),
D register value = 39 (H)
It becomes.
(2) In the E register, the lower address of the RWM 61 storing the item condition device number is stored in order to generate the second control command during the control command when transmitting the item condition device number.
Since the address of the RWM 61 in which the item condition condition device number is stored is “F0B6” as shown in FIG. 72 (A),
E register value = B6 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S702, the control command transmission number is set. In this example, since three commands are transmitted, the number of control command transmissions is “3”. Store this value in the B register. Therefore,
B register value = 3 (H)
It becomes.
In the next step S703, the continuous command set (M_CONCMDS_SET) shown in FIG. 72 (C) is executed.
First, since the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) in step S711 is the same as that shown in FIG. By executing the control command set 1, the control command to be transmitted is stored in the control command buffer.

In the next step S712, an output request for the next control command is set. Here, the D register value and the E register value are each incremented by “1”. In the above example
D register value = 3 A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
It becomes.
Next, in step S713, it is determined whether the control command set has been completed. Here, the B register value is decremented by “1”, and when the decremented value is “0”, it is determined that the control command has been set, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when the decremented value is not "0", it is determined that the control command setting has not been completed, and the process returns to step S711.

As mentioned above,
D register value = 3 A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
Then, when it returns to step S711 next, the control command of the effect group number is transmitted. Next, in step S 712, the D register value and the E register value are each further incremented by “1”.
D register value = 3 B (H)
E register value = B8 (H)
It becomes. Thereby, the control command of the push order instruction number is transmitted by the control command set 1 in the subsequent step S711.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the control command as shown in FIG. 45 (the first embodiment) is provided by sequentially arranging the addresses of the control commands to be transmitted (sequentially arranging the RWM 61). Consecutive sets become unnecessary.
However, when the command transmission tables 1 and 2 are provided and the control command continuous setting process is provided as in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the addresses of the RWM 61 in the transmission order of control commands. Therefore, the restriction of the address arrangement (order) of the RWM 61 is relaxed in the first embodiment. On the other hand, with the configuration as in the second embodiment, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 as in the first embodiment become unnecessary.

In the second embodiment, control commands are transmitted in the order of the addresses “F0B6”, “F0B7”, and “F0B8”. On the other hand, it is also possible to transmit control commands in the order of the addresses "F0B8", "F0B7" and "F0B6".
In this case, in the command output request set in step S701,
D register value = 3 B (H)
E register value = B8 (H)
I assume.
Further, in step S712, the D register value and the E register value are each decremented by "1",
D register value = 3 A (H)
E register value = B7 (H)
I assume. Even if it sets in this way, it becomes the same as the above. However, the transmission order of the control command is as follows: push order instruction number → effect group number → feature condition device number.
Furthermore, it is also possible to transmit the six control commands shown in the command transmission table 1 of the first embodiment by the method of the second embodiment.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the symbol stop signal table 2 (FIG. 57) is set when the 1BB is won or when the condition device in the 1BB is not won.
However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when a specific winning and replay condition device is won in the interior of 1BB, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is suspended to the effective line prior to the combination of symbols corresponding to the elected condition device. The symbol stop signal table 2 may be set also in the case where it is caused.
For example, in the first embodiment, since the strong chance of the conditional device number “50” is “PB = 1”, the strong chance is stopped regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and the 1BB win is carried over Even if it is not possible to win 1BB. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the condition device number "50" is selected, the aim of the symbol stop signal table 1 is transmitted as a symbol stop signal regardless of whether or not the inside of 1BB is inside.

On the other hand, it is assumed that a chance eye of “PB ≠ 1” is provided. Then, when the player wins the chance in the inside of the 1BB, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set in order to make the winning 1BB possible to win, and the symbol stop signal for aiming at the "black BAR" is displayed. It may be sent.
For example, it is assumed that the combination of the symbol of the chance eye is "watermelon A / watermelon B"-"blank"-"black BAR". As a result, the chance is the "PB ≠ 1".
Then, when it is considered better to stop the chance of winning the game or to win the 1BB carrying the win, it is better to win the 1BB. Conceivable. Therefore, in this case, a symbol stop signal for aiming at the "black BAR" is transmitted.

Further, it is assumed that a small combination of "PB ≠ 1" and a small combination with one or two (less than three) payouts (hereinafter referred to as "first specified small combination") is provided. And, when winning the first specified small combination in the inside of the 1BB, rather than winning the first specified small combination in the game to obtain a profit of one or two sheets, it will win the 1BB in the game concerned It is also possible to think that it is better to start playing 1BB games.
Therefore, when the first specific small winning combination is won in the inside of 1BB, the symbol stop signal table 2 is set, and a symbol stop signal for aiming at "black BAR" may be transmitted.

Furthermore, when a small combination of "PB ≠ 1" and a second specified small combination with 3 payouts (the same number as the number of inserted medals) is provided, the second specified small combination is won within 1BB. When you do, it is also possible to think that it is more advantageous to win the second specified small winning combination in the game and to obtain three profits. For example, when four or more small winning combinations are won in the next game, it is possible to make the difference number positive in the next game. In this case, a symbol stop signal for aiming a small bonus is transmitted.
On the other hand, if it is thought that it is better to give priority to the winning of 1BB than the winning of the second specified small winning combination, priority is given to winning 1BB carrying over the winning in the game concerned, aiming at "black BAR". Send a symbol stop signal to do

  In addition, if you win the small part (hereinafter referred to as the 3rd specified small part) of 4 or more payout number “PB ≠ 1”, the person who made the 3rd specified small part in the game wins the said The difference number in the game is positive. Therefore, in this case, the symbol stop signal table 1 is set, and a symbol stop signal for aiming a small game is transmitted.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) The display of the acquisition number display LED 72 during the non-AT (after the operation of the start switch 41) may be in the extinguished state other than “00”. Alternatively, it may be “* 0” (“*” means extinguished). In order to turn off at least one digit of the acquisition number display LED 72, the LED display request flag may be set to “0”, or the LED segment table may be made to have data of the off state.

(2) The upper digit display of the push order instruction information is not limited to "=". For example, it may be composed of specific alphabetic characters not used for error display, specifically, "J", "L" and the like.
Further, the display of the pressing order instruction information may be displayed by one digit. However, if it is displayed as a single digit number, it is difficult to distinguish whether it is push order instruction information or an acquired number. However, if the push order instruction information is displayed only with the upper digit (digit 3) (the digit 4 which is the lower digit is turned off), it can be substantially different from the display of the acquired number.

(3) It is also possible to display the condition device number itself as the display of push order instruction information. For example, when the condition device number “25” (pushing order bell) is won, “25” may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 72.
(4) In the present embodiment, in step S220 of FIG. 52, "100 (decimal number)" is added to the push order instruction number to generate push order instruction data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and from the beginning, the push order instruction number may be set to "101" to "109" (decimal number) so that "100" need not be added.

(5) In this embodiment, the symbol stop signal setting process (S_IF2_SET) of FIG. 55 and the test signal / condition device information output of FIG. Normally, all programs including these programs are stored in the program area of the ROM 62 in FIG. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to store a program unrelated to a game, such as a program to be transmitted to a test machine, in the second program area. Thereby, the storage capacity of the first program area in which the main process (M_MAIN) and the like of FIG. 41 are stored can have a margin.
In particular, in the case of a conventional machine in which the AT is managed by the sub control board 80, the program related to the AT could be stored in the ROM 82 of the sub control board 80.
In addition, in a slot machine which does not execute AT, for example, a slot machine such as a conventional so-called normal A type, a sufficient capacity for storing a program related to transmission of a test signal can be secured in the first program area.

However, in the case of the type in which the AT is managed on the main control board 60 side as in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the storage capacity of the first program area may not be enough. Then, about the program regarding transmission of the test signal which is a program unrelated to a game, storing in a 2nd program area is mentioned.
Furthermore, in the second program area, storing a program related to error detection that is not related to the progress of the game may allow the storage capacity of the first program to have a margin.

  (6) Furthermore, although the command transmission tables 1 and 2 shown in the first embodiment are originally programs for transmitting commands, as shown in FIGS. 43 (B) and 44 (B), It is stored as data. Therefore, the command transmission tables 1 and 2 can be stored not only in the program area of the ROM 62 but also in the data area. In this way, it is possible to store the command transmission table in the data area when the program capacity is full but the data capacity is surplus.

(7) In the main processing of FIG. 41, interrupt prohibition is executed in step S55 before the symbol stop signal setting process in step S56, and the interrupt is permitted in step S57 after the symbol stop signal setting process is completed. As described above, in addition to providing interrupt prohibition / permission in the main processing, it is also possible to provide interrupt prohibition / permission during the symbol stop signal setting processing.
Specifically, as patterns other than FIGS. 41 and 55, the following patterns may be mentioned.
a) In step S55 of FIG. 41, interrupt prohibition is executed. Further, in FIG. 55, interrupt permission is executed at the end of the symbol stop signal setting process (after step S252). Thereby, step S57 of FIG. 41 is unnecessary.
b) Do not execute step S55 in FIG. Further, in FIG. 55, before step S241, the interrupt prohibition process is executed. Then, after the symbol stop signal setting process is finished, the process returns to the main process, and the interruption permission is executed in step S56.
c) In the main processing, neither the interruption prohibition of step S55 nor the interruption permission of step S57 is executed. On the other hand, in FIG. 55, before the step S241, interrupt prohibition processing is executed. Furthermore, after step S252, interrupt permission is executed. Then, the processing returns to the main processing.

  (8) Although the interrupt cycle is 2.235 ms, it is not limited to this value. For example, various times such as 1 ms can be mentioned. When the lighting time of the digit is set to one interruption time as in the present embodiment, the lighting time of one digit depends on the interruption time. Furthermore, since the 2-byte time waiting process uses the interrupt counter, the waiting time (value stored in the BC register) also changes depending on how long the interrupt cycle is set.

(9) In the present embodiment, the gaming number upper limit value at the time of RB operation is set to “2”, and the winning number upper limit value at the time of RB operation is set to “2”. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and in accordance with the current rules, the game frequency upper limit value at the time of RB operation is “12” or less, and the prize frequency upper limit value at the time of RB operation is “8” or less. Good.
(10) In the above embodiment, the effect group number is selected uniformly and transmitted to the sub control board 80 at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and selection of the effect group number or transmission to the sub control board 80 may be performed during non-AT. On the other hand, during AT, the selected condition device number may be directly transmitted to the sub control board 80 without selecting the effect group number or the like. In the AT, since the correct pressing order is notified, even if the conditional device number is directly transmitted to the sub control board 80, there is no concern that the information is illegally acquired and the correct pressing order is known.
As in the present embodiment, regardless of the non-AT / AT, if the effect group number is always selected and transmitted to the sub control board 80, it is not necessary to determine the non-AT / AT every game. And the control processing burden is reduced.

  (11) In the above embodiment, although the replay lottery is not performed in the RT5 (1BB gaming), it is of course possible to perform the replay lottery in the RT5 (1BB gaming). For example, by providing a replay that can be aligned with "7" or "BAR" by pushing order and pushing, and notifying that pushing order and push should be made when the replay is won. It can be mentioned. Then, after showing "7" or "BAR" alignment to the player, it is possible to perform AT winning or the addition of the number of AT games, and the like.

(12) In the present embodiment, since only one type of 1BB ("Black BAR" aligned) is provided as a special part, only the symbol stop signal table 2 is provided, and the symbol stop signal is produced in a game where 1BB can be won. Table 2 was set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other 1BBs and other special roles may be provided, in which case a symbol stop signal table specific to the special role is provided and a game in which the special role can be won Then, the symbol stop signal table corresponding to the special part is set.
For example, it is assumed that a special combination consisting of a combination of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" is provided as another special combination. In this case, the symbol stop signal table 3 (aim for red 7) may be set in a game in which the special part can be won. In addition, data of symbol stop signal table 3 (red 7 aim) is
"DEFB 0,17,13,7"
It becomes.

(13) In the flowchart shown in the present embodiment, the order of the processes is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and when the order of the processes can be changed, it is also possible to change the order of the processes .
(14) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 has been exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to a ball and ball game machine, an enclosed type game machine, and the like.
(15) The present embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Supplementary Note>
The inventions described in the initial specification and the like of the present application (initial inventions) may include, for example, the following first inventions 1 to 11, and in order to solve the problems to be solved by the initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means of the invention and the effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the first invention is not meant to be limited to the following first to first inventions 1-11.
The first invention according to the claims of the present application corresponds to the first invention 8 below.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention The first invention relates to a gaming machine in which an AT is managed by the main control means.
Conventionally, a slot machine that manages AT (informing game) with a main control means (main control board) and a slot machine that manages AT with a sub control means (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the case of the former, it is necessary to generate a control command such as whether or not the current state is AT, and transmit the control command to the sub control means (for example, see JP-A-2014-150881). .
However, in the above-mentioned prior art, since notification of push order during AT is performed exclusively on the side of the sub control means, there is a problem that it can not function as a gaming machine without the sub control means. is there.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable it to function as a gaming machine with only the main control means.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 1 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device (acquisition number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means;
It has a plurality of types of main gaming states (main gaming state 0 to main gaming state 7) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means is
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
And storage means capable of storing the main gaming state (RWM 61 address "F08F" (_NB_GAM_STS)), and
The main control means is that the main gaming state stored in the storage means is a specific main gaming state (during an AT like main gaming state 2 or 3), and the lottery result of the lottery means is predetermined Information on the operation mode (the correct pressing order) of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player in the game where the lottery result (for example, the pressing order bell winning of the conditional device numbers "23" to "40") is obtained (pushing order instruction information) Is displayed on the display device.
Also, a second solution is the first solution, wherein
The main control means is
When the main gaming state stored in the storage means is the specific main gaming state, and the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the predetermined lottery result, the player is determined based on the lottery result Execute a predetermined process (selection of push order instruction number (steps S215 to S218 in FIG. 52) for determining an operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous to the
The main gaming state stored in the storage means is another specific main gaming state (during non-AT like main gaming state 0 or 1) different from the specific main gaming state, and of the lottery means When the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result (when "No" in step S214 in FIG. 52), the predetermined process is not performed.

(C) Effects of the First Invention According to the first invention, since information on the operation mode of the stop switch advantageous for the player is displayed by the main control means when the main game state is in the specific state, Can function as a gaming machine.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 2 The same as the first invention.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device (acquisition number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means;
The main control means is
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
An operation mode determination table (pushing order number table) in which the lottery result number of the lottery means and the information of the operation mode of the stop switch are stored in association with each other;
In the game (main gaming state 3, AT) in which the main control means displays information on the operation mode of the stop switch, the lottery result number of the lottery means is used as an offset value for the operation mode determination table of the stop switch Information (pushing order instruction number) is acquired (steps S215 to S218 in FIG. 52), and information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device based on the acquired information (steps S220 and S221 in FIG. 52) Step S645 in FIG.
It is characterized by

Also, a second solution is the first solution, wherein
The display consists of a high order digit (digit 3) and a low order digit (digit 4),
The main control means executes a predetermined operation (a process of adding "100 (decimal number)") to the information acquired from the operation mode determination table in a game in which information of the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed Accordingly, the information (“=”) to be displayed in the upper digit of the display device and the information (“1” to “9”) to be displayed in the lower digit are characterized.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 2 According to the first invention, since information on the operation mode of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player is displayed by the main control means in the specific main gaming state, the sub control means The gaming machine can be functioned without the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch.
Furthermore, acquisition and display of information on the operation mode of the stop switch can be performed with a small storage capacity.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 3 The invention originally relates to a gaming machine in which an AT is managed by the main control means.
Conventionally, a slot machine that manages AT (informing game) with a main control means (main control board) and a slot machine that manages AT with a sub control means (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the former case, it is necessary to generate a control command such as whether or not the current state is AT, and transmit the control command to the sub control means (see, for example, JP-A-2014-150881). .
However, in the above-mentioned prior art, since the storage capacity of the main control means is limited, efficient information processing is required when transmitting a control command from the main control means to the sub control means.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to transmit control commands to the sub control means efficiently with a small storage capacity in the main control means.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 3 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display device (acquisition number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means;
A sub-control unit (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling an effect based on information transmitted from the main control unit;
The main control means is
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
An operation mode determination table (pushing order number table) in which the lottery result number of the lottery means and the information of the operation mode of the stop switch are stored in association with each other;
The main control means is
In a game in which information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device, information on the operation mode of the stop switch (push order instruction number) is acquired from the operation mode determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value. (FIG. 52), based on the acquired information, transmitting information on the operation mode of the stop switch to the sub control means (steps S58 and S59 in FIG. 41);
A game in which information on the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the display device is characterized in that information ("0") on the operation mode of the stop switch determined in advance is transmitted to the sub control means.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 3 According to the first invention, it is possible to obtain information on the operation mode of the stop switch with a small storage capacity and to transmit the information to the sub control means. Further, even in a game in which information on the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed, the processing can be simplified by transmitting predetermined information on the operation mode of the stop switch.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 4 The same as the first invention 3.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 4 The first invention is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling an effect based on information transmitted from the main control unit;
The main control means is
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
And an effect information determination table (effect group number table) storing the lottery result number of the lottery means and the effect information in association with each other.
The effect information is information which can output an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and is information which can not specify the lottery result of the lottery means,
The main control means enables determination of effect information from the effect information determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value (FIG. 54), and transmits the determined effect information to the sub control means (FIG. 41) Step S59),
The sub-control means controls the output of the effect based on the received effect information.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 4 According to the first invention, it is possible to determine presentation information and transmit the information to the sub control means with a small storage capacity. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the lottery means can not be specified from the effect information transmitted to the sub control means, the goto act can be prevented.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by Invention 5 The same as in Invention 3
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 5 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub control means (sub control board 80) capable of controlling effects based on information transmitted from the main control means;
A display device (acquisition number display LED 72) controlled by the main control means;
The main control means is
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
An operation mode determination table (push order instruction number table) in which the lottery result number of the lottery means and the information of the operation mode of the stop switch are stored in association with each other;
And an effect information determination table (effect group number table) storing the lottery result number of the lottery means and the effect information in association with each other.
The effect information is information which can output an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and is information which can not specify the lottery result of the lottery means,
The main control means enables determination of effect information from the effect information determination table using the lottery result number of the lottery means as an offset value (FIG. 54), and transmits the determined effect information to the sub control means (FIG. 41) Step S59),
The sub control means controls the output of the effect based on the received effect information,
The main control means acquires information on the operation mode of the stop switch from the operation mode determination table based on the lottery result number of the lottery means in the game for displaying the information on the operation mode of the stop switch (FIG. 52). Information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the display device based on the acquired information (FIG. 65)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 5 According to the first invention, it is possible to determine presentation information with a small storage capacity and to transmit the information to the sub control means. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the lottery means can not be specified from the effect information transmitted to the sub control means, the goto act can be prevented.
In addition, it is possible to acquire information on the operation mode of the stop switch and to display the information with a small storage capacity.
Furthermore, since the information on the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed by the main control means, the gaming machine can be made to function temporarily without notification of the operation mode of the stop switch by the sub control means.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 6 The first invention relates to a gaming machine in which an AT is managed by the main control means.
Conventionally, a slot machine for managing AT (informing game) by main control means (sub control board) and a slot machine for managing AT by sub control means (sub control board) are known.
Here, in the case of the former, it is necessary to generate a control command as to whether or not the current state is AT, and to transmit the control command to the sub control means (see, for example, JP-A-2014-150881).
However, in the above-mentioned prior art, since the storage capacity of the program of the main control means is limited, efficient information processing has been required.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to improve the storage capacity of the main control means.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 6 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling an effect based on information transmitted from the main control unit;
The main control means is
A first storage unit (RWM 61) capable of updating information according to the progress of the game;
A second storage unit (ROM 62, command transmission table 1, command transmission table 2) storing the number of commands to be transmitted to the sub control unit and data for generating the command to be transmitted to the sub control unit;
When the main control means satisfies a predetermined condition,
1) A value indicating a predetermined address of the second storage means (for example, "1D1F" in the case of command transmission table 1) is stored in the register R1 (HL register),
2) Store the number of commands to be transmitted (for example, "6" in the case of command transmission table 1) in the register R2 (register A),
Repeat the processing in the following 3) to 5) until the value stored in the register R2 becomes a specific value 3) Data for generating a command by adding a predetermined value (“1”) to the register R1 Designating the address at which the data is stored and reading the data stored at that address 4) Generate a command from the read data (for example, in the command transmission table 1, the command indicating the operating status is “3215 (H)”) Write the command in the command buffer (“F113” to “F153”) for transmitting the command to the sub control means 5) Subtracting “1” from the value stored in the register R2.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 6 According to the first invention, the storage capacity of the main control means can be made more efficient.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 7 The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a gaming machine and a testing machine are connected, and a test signal can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the testing machine.
In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine which is provided with a main control means and a sub control means, and from the sub control means to transmit a test signal concerning a stop execution position signal to the test machine (e.g. -100410)).
However, in the prior art, since the test signal is transmitted from the sub control means, there is a question as to whether the accuracy (transparency) of the ball test can be sufficiently secured.
The problem to be solved by the invention in the first place is to be able to transmit a test signal which can sufficiently ensure the accuracy (transparency) of the ball test.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 7 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
The lottery result of the lottery means has a lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device numbers “23” to “40”, etc.) having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch and an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Not have a lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device numbers “1”, “15”, “48”, etc.),
The main control means is
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) Based on the information stored in the storage means, the number of missed winning combinations is minimized in the game (the item condition device number is “0”) not winning the special role (1BB) for transitioning to The information (“0, 3, 12, 8”) including the operation timing is selected, and a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal is executed.
The game is stored in the storage means in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23") among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (N, 127, 127, 127) (including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch are based on the selected information) However, “N” is characterized by selecting “1” to “6”) and executing processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

The second solution is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch (for example, condition device numbers "23" to "40", etc.) and a lottery result not having an advantageous pressing order of the stop switch. (Eg, with condition device numbers “1”, “15”, “48”, etc.),
The main control means is
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that does not store the winning information of the special role (1BB) for transitioning to a game (the item condition device number is “0”), based on the information stored in the storage unit, the winning role is dropped The information (“0, 3, 12, 8”) including the operation timing to be minimized is selected, and a process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal is executed.
The game is stored in the storage means in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23") among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (N, 127, 127, 127) (including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch are based on the selected information) However, “N” is characterized by selecting “1” to “6”) and executing processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 7 According to the first invention, it is possible to transmit an appropriate test signal (pattern stop signal) directly from the main control means in accordance with the presence or absence of winning a special part and the lottery result in the game. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a test signal sufficiently securing the accuracy (transparency) of the ball test.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by Invention 8 The same as in Invention 7
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
It is a gaming machine that can transmit to the outside,
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of advantageous operation modes of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
Means for carrying over the winning combination information of the special combination until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped when the special combination (1BB) which is advantageous to the player is won by the lottery means (address of RWM 61 Storage means of the item condition device number provided in "F040";
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (for example, winning and replay condition device number "0"), and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number " 23 ”) and
The main control means is
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result (winning and replay condition device number “0”) among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and the special combination is won, and In a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped, the operation timing of the stop switch that allows the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination to be stopped based on the information stored in the storage means A process (step S56 in FIG. 41) is executed to select information (“0, 19, 18, 17”) from the storage means and output the information as a test signal.
The lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number “48”) among the lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and the special combination is won. And, in a game in which it is not possible to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part, information including an operation timing which minimizes the loss of the winning part based on the information stored in the storage means (“0 , 3, 12, 8 ′ ′) and execute processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 8 According to the first invention, in a game winning a special part, an appropriate test signal (design stop signal) is transmitted directly from the main control means in accordance with the lottery result in the game. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal sufficiently securing the accuracy (transparency) of the ball test.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 9 The same as the first invention 7.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 9 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal (design stop signal) by the main control unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of information of advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (winning and replay condition device number "0") and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23" ) And
The main control means is
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) related to the progression of the game;
A second process (pattern stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) related to transmission of a test signal;
During execution of processing based on the first program, executing interrupt processing (FIG. 64) that executes processing different from processing based on the first program by interrupts at regular intervals,
During execution of the second processing based on at least the second program, control is performed to inhibit the interrupt processing (step S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that has not won a special role (1BB) to shift to a game, information including operation timing that minimizes the loss of the winning combination based on the information stored in the storage unit (“0, 3, 3, 12, 8 ") and execute the process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal,
The game is stored in the storage means in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23") among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (N, 127, 127, 127) (including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch are based on the selected information) However, “N” is characterized by selecting “1” to “6”) and executing processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

The second solution is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal (design stop signal) by the main control unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of information of advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (winning and replay condition device number "0") and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23" ) And
The main control means is
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) related to the progression of the game;
A second process (pattern stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) related to transmission of a test signal;
During execution of processing based on the first program, executing interrupt processing (FIG. 64) that executes processing different from processing based on the first program by interrupts at regular intervals,
During execution of the second processing based on at least the second program, control is performed to inhibit the interrupt processing (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In the game that does not store the winning information of the special part (1BB) to shift to the (The item condition device number in the address "F040" of RWM 61 is "0"), based on the information stored in the storage means Select information ("0, 3, 12, 8") including the operation timing that minimizes the winning of the winning combination, and execute processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal And
The game is stored in the storage means in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23") among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (N, 127, 127, 127) (including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch are based on the selected information) However, “N” is characterized by selecting “1” to “6”) and executing processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 9 According to the first invention, an appropriate test signal (design stop signal) may be transmitted directly from the main control means in accordance with the presence or absence of winning a special part, the lottery result in the game, etc. Since it can, it can transmit the test signal which fully secured the accuracy (transparency) of a ball test.
Furthermore, since interrupt processing is inhibited during execution of the processing for outputting a signal based on the second program, it is possible to prevent power interruption during output of the test signal.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 10 The same as the first invention 7
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 10 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal (design stop signal) by the main control unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of information of advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (winning and replay condition device number "0") and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") ) And
The main control means is
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) related to the progression of the game;
A second process (pattern stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) related to transmission of a test signal;
During execution of processing based on the first program, executing interrupt processing (FIG. 64) that executes processing different from processing based on the first program by interrupts at regular intervals,
In the interrupt process, the power-off process (step S619 in FIG. 64) is executed when it is determined that the power is shut off.
During execution of the second processing based on at least the second program, control is performed to inhibit the interrupt processing (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In a game that has not won a special role (1BB) to shift to a game, information including operation timing that minimizes the loss of the winning combination based on the information stored in the storage unit (“0, 3, 3, 12, 8 ") and execute the process (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal,
The game is stored in the storage means in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23") among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (N, 127, 127, 127) (including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch are based on the selected information) However, “N” is characterized by selecting “1” to “6”) and executing processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

The second solution is
Equipped with main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
It is a gaming machine that executes processing for outputting a test signal by the main control means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 41),
Lottery means (condition device lottery means 63b),
Storage means (ROM 62 storing push order instruction number table) storing information of information of advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, which is information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
The lottery result of the lottery means includes a lottery result not including the winning combination (winning and replay condition device number "0") and a lottery result including one or more winning combinations (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") ) And
The main control means is
A first process (main process) based on a first program (FIG. 41) related to the progression of the game;
A second process (pattern stop signal setting process) based on a second program (FIG. 55) related to transmission of a test signal;
During execution of processing based on the first program, executing interrupt processing (FIG. 64) that executes processing different from processing based on the first program by interrupts at regular intervals,
In the interrupt process, the power-off process (step S619 in FIG. 64) is executed when it is determined that the power is shut off.
During execution of the second processing based on at least the second program, control is performed to inhibit the interrupt processing (S55 in FIG. 41),
In the second process based on the second program,
The lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "15") among lottery results not having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch, and a special game (1BB game) In the game that does not store the winning information of the special part (1BB) to shift to the (The item condition device number in the address "F040" of RWM 61 is "0"), based on the information stored in the storage means Select information ("0, 3, 12, 8") including the operation timing that minimizes the winning of the winning combination, and execute processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal And
The game is stored in the storage means in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result (for example, winning and replay condition device number "23") among the lottery results having an advantageous pushing order of the stop switch. Information (“N, 127, 127, 127” (N, 127, 127, 127) (including the advantageous pressing order of the stop switch corresponding to the lottery result in the game and the operation timing of the stop switch are based on the selected information) However, “N” is characterized by selecting “1” to “6”) and executing processing (step S56 in FIG. 41) for outputting the information as a test signal.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 10 The same as the First Invention 9.

11. Original invention 11
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention The same as the first invention 6.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 11 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (second embodiment) is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling an effect based on information transmitted from the main control unit;
The main control means includes storage means (RWM 61) capable of updating information in accordance with the progress of the game and having a plurality of addresses.
When the main control unit satisfies a predetermined condition (when transmitting a control command),
1) A value indicating a predetermined address among the addresses of the storage means (for example, (A) in FIG. 72, "B6 (H)") is stored in the register R1 (E register),
2) The number of commands to be transmitted (“3” in the example of FIG. 72) is stored in the register R2 (B register) (step S702),
Repeat the following processes 3) and 4) until the value stored in the register R2 becomes a specific value 3) Send a command based on the information stored in the address specified by the register R1 to the sub control means 4) Write “1” to the value stored in the register R1 and subtract “1” from the value stored in the register R2. 4) Write the command buffer (“F113” to “F153”) I assume.

The second solution (second embodiment) is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit (sub-control board 80) capable of controlling an effect based on information transmitted from the main control unit;
The main control means includes storage means (RWM 61) capable of updating information in accordance with the progress of the game and having a plurality of addresses.
When the main control unit satisfies a predetermined condition (when transmitting a control command),
1) A value indicating a predetermined address among the addresses of the storage means (for example, (A) in FIG. 72, "B6 (H)") is stored in the register R1 (E register),
2) Store the number of commands to be transmitted ("3" in the example of FIG. 72) in the register R2 (B register),
Repeat the following processes 3) and 4) until the value stored in the register R2 becomes a specific value 3) Send a command based on the information stored in the address specified by the register R1 to the sub control means 4) Write “1” to the value stored in the register R1 and subtract “1” from the value stored in the register R2 to write the command buffer (“F113” to “F153”). I assume.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 11 According to the first invention, the storage capacity of the main control means can be made more efficient. Furthermore, control commands can be efficiently transmitted without providing a command transmission table.

10 slot machine (game machine)
11 display window 16 door switch 21 effect lamp 22 speaker 23 image display device 24 cross key 25 push button 30 symbol display device 31 reel 32 motor 35 medal payout device 35a hopper 35b sub tank 36 hopper motor 37a, 37b payout sensor 38 full sensor 39 reel Sensor 40a 1 bed switch 40b 3 bed switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 medal passage port 43a passage sensor 44a, 44b closing sensor 45 blocker 46 settlement switch 51 power switch 52 setting key switch 53 setting change / reset switch 54 setting door switch 60 Main control board (main control means)
61 RWM
62 ROM
63 Main CPU
63a Setting change means 63b Condition device lottery means 63c Win flag control means 63d AT lottery means 63e Push order instruction number selection means 63f Effect group number selection means 63g Reel control means 63h Prize determination means 63i Payout means 63j RT control means 63k Main gaming state Control means 64 Set value display LED
70 Display board 71 Storage number display LED
72 Acquisition number display LED
73 status display LED
73a Replay Display LED
73b release possible indicator LED
73c Settlement LED
73d game start LED
73e 1 sheet loading indicator LED
73f 2 pieces insertion LED
73 g 3 pieces insertion LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 RWM
82 ROM
83 Sub CPU
83a Effect output control means 100 External concentrated terminal board

Claims (1)

Credit number display means capable of displaying the number of credits;
And a main control means for controlling the progress of a game,
The main control means is
Control to start the special game state based on meeting the start condition of the special game state,
In the special game state, it is possible to activate special features,
If the special gaming state ending conditions are not satisfied, the special role ending operation is ended when the special role ending conditions are satisfied, and after executing the first waiting process for a predetermined period, the special role again. Enable the operation of the
The main control means can execute interrupt processing in the predetermined period,
The main control means is
The interrupt process executed when the special item is operating in the special game state is a process for outputting a test signal indicating that the special game is in the special game state and the special item is operating. Possible,
A process for outputting a test signal indicating that a special game is in progress and the special bonus is not in operation in the interrupt process executed in the predetermined period when the special bonus is not in operation in the special gaming state Be executable,
The main control means is displayed on the credit number display means when the information displayed on the credit number display means is updated based on stop display of the symbol combination to which a predetermined profit can be given. After updating the information, the second waiting process for a specific period can be executed until the information displayed on the credit number display means is updated next,
The specific period is configured to be longer than the predetermined period,
The main control means comprises push order information storage means capable of storing information on push order;
The above-mentioned main control means becomes a specific lottery result, and in a game in which a predetermined symbol combination can be stopped and displayed when the stop switch is operated in a specific pushing order, the condition for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch is satisfied When there is an optional pressing timing information corresponding to the specific pressing sequence and an optional operation timing as an operation timing of the stop switch based on the information regarding the pressing sequence stored in the pressing sequence information storage means A game machine characterized in that processing for outputting information and as a test signal can be performed .

Images